JP6710024B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a predetermined game.

As a gaming machine, it is provided with a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and a slot in which a prize can be generated according to a display result derived after the variable display unit variably displays and stops. I have a machine. Further, as a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. Pachinko game machines and the like are known.

In such a gaming machine, a player inputs a password using operating means such as a stop switch, a settlement switch, and a production switch provided on the front door, so that the customization included in the password is entered. There is a slot machine capable of changing the image and music of the effect based on the information (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-195327, A

Since the game machine described in Patent Document 1 is provided with an operation means capable of performing settings relating to the game on the front door, when the front door is opened, a person other than the player, for example, sits next to the player. There are cases where the player touches the operation means to perform the operation, or the clerk touches the operation means without realizing it while operating while opening the front door. In such a case, inconvenience may occur in that the game-related settings are made with the content not intended by the player.

The present invention has been conceived in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that prevents a game-related setting from being performed by a content not intended by the player.

(1) variable display executable gaming machine (e.g., the slot machine 1, the pachinko machine 200, pachinko machine 01) A, Open Closed possible closing member (e.g., front door 1b, front wall 100b) and , the open-close detecting means for detecting the opening and closing of the opening and closing member (for example, the process of S151 of FIG. 15) and, operation acceptance means for accepting an operation of the player (e.g., player-side setting switch 70, 170, pushbutton 031B) and A setting capable of adjusting the volume (for example, setting the volume and the amount of light) based on the operation received by the operation receiving unit when the setting screen for adjusting the volume is displayed on the display unit. Means (for example, the processing of S158 of FIG. 15, the processing of S177 of FIG. 16) and the setting means based on the setting screen when the opening/closing member detects that the opening/closing member is in the open state. 23 for prohibiting the adjustment of the volume by (for example, a portion that terminates the player side effect setting process when N is determined in S151 of FIG. 15) and a light emitting section (for example, effect effect LED 52 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 23). Lamp 09 that collectively refers to the light-emitting members 09CC, 09CL, 09CR, 09U, 09SL, or 09SR shown in FIG. 4), and a plurality of control data areas (for example, areas 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 47A). Among the control data (for example, the data for executing the lighting control of the lamp 09, etc.) set to the priority order (for example, the layers assigned to the layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. No. (1 to 5), etc. The higher the number, the higher the priority. The control data area has the highest priority (for example, control data is stored in all five areas of layer 1 to layer 5). If set, the control data set in the area of layer 5. For example, if the control data is set in three areas of layer 1, layer 2 and layer 4, the area of layer 4 The control data set in the area, or, for example, the control data set in the area of layer 3 when the control data is set in the two areas of layer 2 and layer 3. One layer When the control data is set only in the area of (1), the light emission control section (controls the light emission of the light emitting section based on the control data set in the control data set in the area of the one layer) ( For example, the sub CPU 91a that executes the effect execution setting process of S0532 shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. Operation and effect control for CPU0120), wherein the closing member is accepted by the operation acceptance means in a state where the setting screen is displayed when it has been detected is closed by the opening and closing detecting means When the display mode of the setting screen is changed from the first display mode indicating the first volume to the second display mode indicating the second volume based on the above, the opening/closing member is in the open state by the opening/closing detection means. When the open/close member is again detected to be in the closed state by the open/close detection means after the detection of the, the display mode of the setting screen is displayed again in the second display mode so that the second volume It is possible to adjust the volume from the control data area, and the plurality of control data areas include the control data area in which the control data for continuing the light emission of the light emitting unit is set when the variable display is finished, and the variable display. There is a control data area in which control data is set so that the light emission of the light emitting unit is not continued when finished, and the control data area is based on the control data where light emission of the light emitting unit is continued when variable display is finished. The light emission of the light emitting unit ends when the variable display is not executed for a predetermined time.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, the setting relating to the game is prohibited when the opening/closing member is opened, so that the setting relating to the game is performed with the content not intended by the player. It can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The control data related to the error notification for notifying the error (for example, the data set in the control data area of FIG. 47 when the error designation command shown in FIG. 25A is received) has the highest priority. It may be set in the control data area (for example, the control data area of the priority order of layer 5 in FIG. 47A).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to reporting an error.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The priority may be changed according to the gaming state (for example, "low base state", "high base state", or "big hit state" shown in FIG. 47(A)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect according to the gaming state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Said control data area, the control data area where the control data emission is continued of the light emitting portion when said variable display has ended is set (for example, shown in Figure 52, the normal BGM lamp control data Layer 1 control data area to be set) and a control data area in which control data in which light emission of the light emitting unit is not continued when the variable display is finished (for example , a notice A lamp shown in FIG. 52) is set. Control data area of layer 3 for setting control data).

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable lighting effect for each control data area.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The light emission control unit controls light emission of the light emission unit in response to a production control command related to production control (for example , a customer waiting demonstration designation command shown in FIG. 25A), and is in a state of a gaming machine. Different (for example, when it is different whether or not it is within a predetermined time after receiving the initialization designation command shown in FIG. 53), different modes corresponding to the same effect control command (for example, The light emission of the light emitting unit may be controlled in a mode of executing the BGM lamp effect of customer waiting A and a mode of executing the BGM lamp effect of customer waiting B shown in FIG. 53.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect according to the state of the gaming machine.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The control data area is set with control data for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit when the variable display ends (for example, at T44 when the variable display ends in FIG. 52). A region (for example , a control data region of layer 3 for setting the notice A lamp control data shown in FIG. 52) and a control for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit when the light emission of the light emitting unit has passed a predetermined time. A control data area in which data is set (for example, a control data area of layer 1 in which normal BGM lamp control data shown in FIG. 52 is set to end light emission when a predetermined time counted by a timer has elapsed) 50, or a layer 3 control data area for setting winning count lamp control data for terminating light emission when a predetermined time counted by a timer elapses). Good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set control data for executing a suitable lighting effect for each control data area.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Display means (for example, the processing of S153 of FIG. 15) for displaying a setting screen (for example, the setting screen shown in FIG. 13) for performing the settings relating to the game,
The display means displays before the opening after the opening/closing member is opened and closed again in a state where the setting screen is displayed when the closing of the opening/closing member is detected by the opening/closing detection means. The setting screen that was being displayed (for example, the part that continues to display the setting screen even if the front door 1b is once opened while the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is closed). It may be.

According to such a configuration, even if the opening/closing member is opened and then closed again while the setting screen is displayed when the opening/closing member is closed, the setting screen before opening is displayed. Even if the opening/closing member is once opened, the settings relating to the game can be made from the continuation before the opening. Therefore, the convenience of the player is improved and no dissatisfaction is felt.

"Display the setting screen that was displayed before the opening" means that the setting screen that was displayed when the opening/closing member was closed continues to be displayed even while the opening/closing member is open, and the opening/closing member is closed again. Including the case where the setting screen is displayed afterward. Also, "display the setting screen that was displayed before opening" means that the setting screen that was displayed when the opening/closing member was closed is not displayed during opening, and the opening/closing member is closed again. Including the case where the setting screen before opening is redisplayed after the release.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The setting means is capable of setting an effect mode during a game (for example, setting a volume and a light amount) as a setting relating to the game,
Display means (for example, the process of S153 of FIG. 15) for displaying a setting screen (for example, the setting screen shown in FIG. 13) for setting the effect mode,
The display means displays, as the setting screen, a screen in which the effect mode can be set by using the effect during the game as an example (for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the volume of the voice of the teammate character is changed). Up and down, and the amount of light on the screen of the battle effect goes up and down).

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to set the effect mode by using the effect during the game as an example, the player can easily perform the setting.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The game shop operation (for example, the channels of the store side setting switches 60, 160) performed when the permission condition for the game store is established (for example, when the store side setting switches 60, 160 are made operable). Based on the switching operation), a game shop setting means (for example, a first volume level, a first light intensity level) for setting any one of a plurality of levels related to the effect mode during the game as a first level (for example, a first volume level, a first light level level). Processing of S132 of FIG. 12),
Based on a player operation (for example, an operation to a stop switch) performed when the permission condition for the player is satisfied (for example, when the setting screen shown in FIG. 13 is displayed), A player setting means (for example, the process of S158 of FIG. 15, S177 of FIG. 16) that sets any one of a plurality of stages relating to the effect mode as the second stage (for example, the second volume stage, the second light amount stage). Processing),
Performance execution means (for example, speakers 53, 54, liquid crystal, etc.) that performs a performance in a performance mode according to the first stage set by the game shop setting means and the second stage set by the player setting means. Display 51, effect LED 52),
Display control means for controlling the display contents displayed in the display area visible to the player (for example, the sub-control unit 91 displays the setting screen shown in FIG. 13 and sets the emphasized volume level and light level. Change display control) and
The display control means displays a stage display showing the second stage in the display area when the player operation is performed (for example, a display for displaying the setting screen shown in FIG. 13 by the sub-control unit 91). Control) so that the initial display of the stage display when the stage display is displayed differs depending on the first stage set by the game shop setting means (for example, see FIG. 14). It may be displayed (for example, display control for displaying the initial display of the volume and the light amount on the setting screen shown in FIG. 13 according to the first volume level and the first light level).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably set the presentation mode.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
The setting means is capable of setting an effect mode during a game (for example, setting a volume and a light amount) as a setting relating to the game,
The effect mode changing means capable of changing the effect mode stepwise based on the operation accepted by the operation accepting means (for example, in the processing of S158 of FIG. 15 and S178 of FIG. 16, highlighted in accordance with the operation content. (A part that changes to the volume and light level corresponding to the volume level and light level)
When an operation is accepted by the operation accepting unit, a confirmation effect executing unit that executes an effect for confirmation corresponding to an effect mode set by the setting unit after the operation (for example, a confirmation sound in S178 of FIG. 16). And a portion for outputting
The setting means can set the effect mode within a predetermined range (for example, can set the volume within the range of each volume level (“2” to “14”) shown in FIG. 13),
When the effect mode set by the setting unit is within the limit of the predetermined range, the confirmation effect executing unit receives the operation by the operation accepting unit so as to change the effect mode to outside the predetermined range. At this time, a confirmation effect corresponding to the effect mode at the limit of the predetermined range is executed (for example, in S173 of FIG. 16, a confirmation sound corresponding to the maximum volume within the range of volume levels operable by the player is output. Part, or a part which outputs a confirmation sound corresponding to the minimum volume within the range of volume levels operable by the player in S176).

According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted by the operation accepting unit to set the effect mode beyond the predetermined range, the confirmation effect corresponding to the effect mode immediately before exceeding the predetermined range is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the player is trying to set beyond the predetermined range.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the present embodiment. It is a perspective view showing an internal structure of the slot machine. It is a figure showing a store side setting switch. It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a slot machine. It is a diagram showing a target combination of the internal lottery for each type of winning combination and game state. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of the game processing which a main control part performs. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of BET processing which a main control part performs. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of BET processing which a main control part performs. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of BET processing which a main control part performs. It is a diagram for explaining the timing when the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the end of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the store side payout rate setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of store side production setting processing which a sub control part performs. It is a figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting a volume and a light quantity. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state of a store side setting switch, and a sound volume and a light quantity. It is a flow chart which shows the control contents of the player side production setting processing which a sub control part performs. 7 is a flowchart showing the control content of a volume changing operation process executed by a sub control unit. It is a figure which shows the setting screen by the side of a shop in a modification. It is a figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting the volume in a modification. It is a figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting the volume in a modification. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the glass door and front frame of the pachinko game machine in a modification. It is a figure showing a game system using a pachinko game machine in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|generation effect screen in a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example etc of contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for games counted by the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data holding area for game control. It is the figure which shows the constitution example and the like of production control pattern. It is the block diagram etc which shows the constitution example of the data retention area for production control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the starting winning a prize decision processing in the special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart and the like showing an example of a random number determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of a fluctuation pattern. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the winning a prize production decision processing in the production control process treatment. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. (A) A diagram showing an example of a control data area in which a priority order is set according to a game state, and (B) A diagram showing an example of a control data area in which a priority order is changed according to a game state is there. It is a time chart which shows an example of lamp control in a low base state. It is a time chart which shows an example of lamp control in a high base state. It is a time chart which shows an example of lamp control in a big hit state. It is a time chart which shows an example of the lamp control which concerns on the control data area of the same layer. 7 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control relating to the end of light emission. It is a time chart which shows an example of the lamp control which concerns on the same production control command. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production execution setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production execution setting processing.

An example of a mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the embodiment. First, an embodiment in which the gaming machine is a slot machine will be described.

[Structure of slot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having a front opening, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. There is. The front door 1b can open and close the opened front side of the housing 1a by rotating with respect to the housing 1a.

Inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. (Also referred to as reels) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three continuous symbols among the symbols arranged on these reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided on the front door 1b through the transparent window. It is arranged so that it can be seen from 3.

For example, "black 7", "net 7", "white 7", "BAR", "replay", "watermelon", "white cherry", and "bell" are provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. A plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other, such as ", are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three rows in the see-through window 3, respectively.

The reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are continuously displayed on the see-through window 3. While being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed as a display result on the transparent window 3.

Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side are provided. Is provided. The reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to the continuous three symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be independently illuminated.

A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The player can visually recognize each reel 2L, 2C, 2R through the transparent area 51b corresponding to the transparent window 3 of the display area 51a and the transparent window 3.

The front door 1b has a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and a credit (the number of medals stored as a gaming value owned by a player and which can be used to set the number of bets). One bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets for one medal using, and the maximum of the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within that range using credits. MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the bet number (2 in the present embodiment, RB (BB) in the gaming state, 3 in the normal gaming state), the medal and the bet number stored as credits A settlement switch 10 that is operated to settle the medals used to set (return the medals used to set the credits and the number of bets), a start switch 7 that is operated to start the game, Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped are provided so as to be operated by the player.

In the present embodiment, the single BET switch 5 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are provided on the front surface of the operation panel forming the front door 1b, that is, on the same surface.

The front door 1b is provided with a player-side setting switch 70 for setting an effect mode during a game. Since the player-side setting switch 70 is provided on the front side of the front door 1b (that is, outside the front door 1b), it will be located on the front side of the slot machine 1 when the front door 1b is closed. .. Therefore, an external operation such as an operation by a player playing the slot machine 1 is possible. By operating the player-side setting switch 70, the player can set the volume and light amount in the effect during the game.

On the front door 1b, a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, and an error occurrence such as the number of medals in the BB or foreign matter other than a regular medal being inserted into the medal inserting section 4 There is provided a game auxiliary display device 12 which sometimes displays an error code indicating its content.

On the front door 1b, 1 bet LED 14 for notifying by lighting that the bet number is set to 1, 2 bet LED 15 for notifying by lighting that the bet number is set to 2 and 3 bet number being set A 3BET LED 16 for notifying by lighting, a request LED 17 for notifying that a medal can be inserted by lighting, a start valid LED 18 for notifying that the start operation of the game by operating the start switch 7 is valid, and a weight. (Waiting for start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game) LED to indicate that the game is in progress, and LED to indicate that the replay game is in progress An LED 20 is provided during replay. The replay game is a game started after the bet number is automatically set.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 which lights up to inform that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is valid. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are provided to notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting. It is provided.

Inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state and a hit state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is performed) by a predetermined key operation, A set value display 24 is provided for displaying the set value at that time while changing the set value or confirming the set value.

Inside the front door 1b, the flow path of the medals thrown in from the medal throwing section 4 is provided on either the hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) side provided inside the casing 1a or the medal payout exit 9 side. A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and an input medal sensor (disposed on the hopper tank 34a side of the flow path switching solenoid 30) for detecting medals that have been inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 and have flowed down to the hopper tank 34a side. It has a medal selector (not shown).

Inside the front door 1b, a store-side setting switch 60 is provided for making a setting that serves as a reference for an effect mode during a game. Since the store clerk owns the key for opening the front door 1b, the store-side setting switch 60 can be operated from the outside by opening the front door 1b. On the other hand, a person other than a store clerk such as a player cannot operate the store side setting switch 60 because the front door 1b cannot be opened. That is, the store-side setting switch 60 is an operating means for a game store in which the slot machine 1 is installed. By operating the store side setting switch 60, the store clerk can set the volume and the amount of light in the effect during the game as a reference.

As shown in FIG. 3, the store-side setting switch 60 is a switch for switching a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”. The store clerk can switch these channels by rotating the knob 61. For each of the channels "0" to "F", the volume and the amount of light in the effect are divided into stages. The volume level corresponding to the channels “0” to “F” is referred to as a first volume level, and the level of the light amount corresponding to the channels “0” to “F” is also referred to as a first light level stage. For example, if the channel is “0”, it is set to the first volume level set to the minimum volume and the first volume level set to the minimum light level. If the channel is “F”, it is set to the first volume level set to the maximum volume and the first volume level set to the maximum light level.

It should be noted that the steps for the volume and the amount of light set by the store clerk based on the operation of the store-side setting switch 60 are referred to as the first volume level and the first light-level stage, while operating the player-side setting switch 70. Therefore, the steps for the volume and the amount of light which can be set by the player are also referred to as a second volume level and a second light level.

Inside the casing 1a, reels 2L, 2C, 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R capable of detecting reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (see FIG. 4)) is provided. Inside the casing 1a, an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a medal payment for the medals stored in the hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out from the outlet 9 and a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b is provided.

An overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a including a pair of conductive members which is provided at a height at which a predetermined amount of stored medals can be detected and which is separated from the right and left is provided. The full tank sensor 35a indicates that when the conductive member comes into contact with the medals stored in the overflow tank 35 to be conductive, the stored amount of medals stored therein becomes a predetermined amount or more, that is, the overflow tank is full. It detects that it is in a tongue state.

A power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a. On the front surface of the power supply box 100, an effective/ineffective of a stopping function for controlling a stopping state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of BB or AT (Assist Time) is provided. A stop switch 36a for selection is provided. The AT is a period during which a navigation effect is executed in which the player is informed of the pressing order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in order to generate a predetermined winning. It is controlled by AT on the condition that it possesses the navigation stock which is the right of AT control. The AT is controlled for a predetermined number of games (50 games in one set in the present embodiment) based on the number of navigation stocks it holds. Therefore, the number of navigation stocks indicates the number of rights controlled by the AT, and the more the number of the navigation stocks is held, the more the ATs are controlled by the AT.

Further, on the front surface of the power supply box 100, the valid/invalid of the automatic settlement function for controlling the automatic settlement process (the process of settlement (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of BB. An automatic settlement switch 36b for selection, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state and a setting confirmation state when the power is turned on (at start-up), and for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. A reset/setting switch 38 that functions as a reset switch and functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (payout rate) of the internal lottery in the setting change state, and is operated when turning the power ON/OFF. The power switch 39 is provided.

The power supply box 100 is equipped with a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38, and a power supply switch 39, which are operated when changing the set value.

The store clerk can operate the setting key switch 37 from the outside by opening the front door 1b. On the other hand, a person other than a store clerk such as a player cannot operate the setting key switch 37 because the front door 1b cannot be opened. That is, the setting key switch 37 is an operating means for a game store in which the slot machine 1 is installed.

A door opening detection switch 25 for detecting opening/closing of the front door 1b is provided above the side surface opposite to the side surface provided with the power supply box 100. The door open detection switch 25 is turned on when the front door 1b closes the opened front side of the housing 1a, while the front door 1b opens the opened front side of the housing 1a. When it is in the off state

When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When the specified number of bets (for example, 3) determined according to the gaming state is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game. Is ready to start. When the maximum number of medals has been inserted among the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

The winning line is a line set to determine whether or not the symbol combination displayed on the transparent window 3 of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is a specific symbol combination. In the present embodiment, these winning combinations are also referred to as “winning combinations” and “winning combinations”, and the combination of symbols that make up any one of the winning combinations is stopped on the winning line. Also referred to as doing. For example, when the symbol combination forming the re-play combination is derived on the pay line, a replay game in which the player can play the next game without setting the number of bets using medals operates. It is also called that a replay winning (replay winning) occurs that the symbol combination that constitutes the regambling combination is derived on the winning line.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R The winning line L2 set across, the winning line L3 set across the symbols arranged in the lower row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the upper row of the reel 2L, the middle row of the reel 2C, the lower row of the reel 2R, that is, the lower right direction. Five types of winning line L4 set across the symbols lined up, the lower stage of reel 2L, the middle stage of reel 2C, the upper stage of reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set across the symbols lined up to the right It is defined as a line.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R continuously change. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped and the display result is derived and displayed on the see-through window 3.

When all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if one of the activated winning lines L1 to L5 has not stopped a combination of symbols that causes a small winning combination, one game ends at that stop. To do. On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols for generating the small winning combination is stopped on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, the number of medals determined according to the winning of the small winning combination is given to the player. Granting (addition of credits, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in the present embodiment), medals are ejected from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1)), and one game ends.

As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game control board 40 controls the game state, and the effect control board 90. The effect according to the game state is controlled by, and the power supply board 101 generates drive power for the electric components that form the slot machine 1, and supplies the drive power to each unit.

The power supply board 101 includes a hopper motor 34b, a dispensing sensor 34c, a full sensor 35a, a stop switch 36a, an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38, and a power switch 39. Are connected.

On the game control board 40, a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, a settlement switch 10, a reset switch 23, a door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 34c, the full sensor 35a, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the setting key switch 37, and the reset are connected via the power supply board 101. /Setting switch 38 is connected, and detection signals of these connected switches are input.

On the game control board 40, the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, the payout indicator 13, the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replay are being performed. The LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected. At the same time, the hopper motor 34b is connected via the power supply board 101, and these electric parts are driven under the control of the main control section 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 is equipped with a main control section 41 for controlling a game. The main control unit 41 is composed of a microcomputer including a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I/O port 41d.

On the game control board 40, a random number circuit 42 that generates a random number in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment), a pulse oscillator 43 that supplies a clock signal of a constant frequency to the random number circuit 42, and the game control board 40. Switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to or through the power supply board 101, a motor drive circuit 45 for controlling the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and a passage switching A solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the solenoid 30, an LED drive circuit 47 that controls the drive of various indicators and LEDs connected to the game control board 40, and monitor the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1, When a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal indicating that fact is output to the main control unit 41, and the main CPU 41a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the main CPU 41a. A reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the device and various other devices and circuits are mounted.

The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a time counting function and a timer interrupt, executes a program stored in the ROM 41b, performs processing relating to the progress of the game, and the game control board 40. Directly or indirectly controlling each part of the control circuit mounted on the. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area or the like when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I/O port 41d inputs/outputs a control signal to/from each circuit connected via a signal input/output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I/O port 41d. Here, from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90, for example, using a unidirectional circuit such as a diode or a transistor, only in one direction (direction from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90). It is configured so that signals cannot pass through. Therefore, the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is transmitted only in one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40.

The effect control board 90 is connected with the effect switch 56, the store-side setting switch 60, and the player-side setting switch 70, and the detection signals of these switches are input.

To the effect control board 90, effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53, 54, and reel LEDs 55 are connected. The effect device is driven under the control of the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

For example, when the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is switched to "0", the sub-control unit 91 adjusts the first volume level of "0" to output the voice at the minimum volume, the speaker 53, In addition to controlling 54, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, and the like are controlled so as to output light with the minimum light amount in accordance with the first light amount step of “0”.

On the effect control board 90, a sub-control unit 91 that controls the effect, a display control circuit 92 that controls the display of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90, and a drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55. An LED drive circuit 93 for performing the above operation, an audio output circuit 94 for performing audio output control from the speakers 53, 54, and a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time. When the reset circuit 95, the switch circuit 96 for detecting the detection signal input from the production switch 56 connected to the production control board 90, and the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored and a voltage drop is detected In addition, an interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a is mounted.

The sub control unit 91 is configured by a microcomputer including a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I/O port 91d. The sub CPU 91a receives commands transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing effects, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. ..

Like the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when a command is received from the main control unit 41, and acquires the command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Execute the command reception interrupt process to store in the buffer. The sub-control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub) every time the number of inputs of the system clock reaches a certain number, that is, at every certain interval.

Unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the command even if the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when the interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The reception interrupt process is executed, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if the interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur simultaneously.

[Setting of payout rate]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of medals (ratio between the total number of medals used for setting the bet number and the total number of medals paid out by winning) changes according to the set value. Specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the internal lottery or the like. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. In terms of payout rate, when the set value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage regarding the game, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the higher the advantage regarding the game is. Will be low.

In order to change the set value of the payout rate, the front door 1b is opened, the power switch 39 of the power box 100 provided in the housing 1a is operated, and the power of the slot machine 1 is ON. In this case, it is necessary to turn off the power of the slot machine 1 after operating the setting key switch 37 by turning the setting key switch 37 on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power source of the slot machine 1 is turned on, the state is changed to the setting change state where the game cannot proceed, and the setting value display 24 is read from the RAM 41c. The set value is displayed as a display value.

In the setting change state, when the reset/setting switch 38 is operated, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by one (when the setting 6 is further operated, the setting is returned to the setting 1). ). After that, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is set as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c, and the game is allowed to proceed. It should be noted that since the power switch 39 is once turned off, the setting key switch 37 is turned on, and the power switch 39 is turned on, the setting is changed to the setting change state. Therefore, the operation is collectively referred to as a setting change operation. ..

In order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with the bet number not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, and the setting value is confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot proceed, and by turning off the setting key switch 37, the setting confirmation state ends, and the game returns to the state in which the game can proceed.

[Internal lottery]
The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state, provided that the prescribed number of bets has been set according to the gaming state. It is possible to start the game.

In the present embodiment, the gaming state includes a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB), a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as BB), and a normal gaming state. Of these, the prescribed number of wagers (the upper limit number) in RB and BB. ) Is defined as 2), and in the normal gaming state, 3 is defined as the prescribed number (upper limit) of the bet number. Therefore, if the gaming state is RB or BB, the game can be started when the bet number is set to 2, and in the normal gaming state, the game is started when the bet number is set to 3. It becomes possible.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated winning line (in the case of the present embodiment, all the winning lines are always activated, In the following, the activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line) and a combination of symbols called a winning combination is provided on the winning line. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols (for example, "replay-replay-replay") or a combination including different symbols (for example, "BAR-replay-replay").

The type of winning combination is determined according to the playing state, but roughly classified, it is set for the small winning combination with payout of medals and the game that won the prize without setting the bet number using the playing value. There are a re-play combination (replay) in which the next game can be started by automatically setting the bet number and a special combination (BB, RB) accompanied by a transition of the game state. In the present embodiment, these winning combinations are also referred to as “winning combinations” and “winning combinations”, and it is awarded that a combination of symbols forming any one of the winning combinations stops at any of the pay lines L1 to L5. Also known as winning. The small role and the replay role are collectively called a general role.

In order for the winning of each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags of each of these winning combinations, the winning flags of the small winning combination and the re-playing winning combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flags of the special winning combination are The flag is valid until the combination of the allowed combinations is prepared by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the allowed combinations is prepared. Once the winning flag of the special combination is won, even if the combination of combinations allowed by the flag cannot be prepared, the winning flag is not invalidated and carried over to the next game.

As the roles in the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 5, a big bonus (BB) and a regular bonus (RB) are defined as special roles, watermelon, cherry, and bell are defined as small roles, and replay is defined as a re-game role. There is.

Cherry wins when a "white cherry" symbol is derived on any of the pay lines on the right reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in any gaming state. When the "white cherry" symbol is stopped on the upper or lower row of the right reel, the combination of cherries is lined up on the two winning lines L2, L5 or the winning lines L3, L4. Two medals are paid out to win the cherry on the line.

A watermelon wins when there is a combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" or "watermelon-watermelon-BAR" on any of the winning lines in any game state, and 15 medals in RB or BB. Are paid out, and 12 medals are paid out in the normal game state. Bell wins when a combination of "bell-bell-bell" is available on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, 15 medals are paid out in RB and BB, and 10 in the normal gaming state. One medal will be paid out.

As replays, first to third replays are provided. The first replay is won when a combination of "replay-replay-replay" is aligned on any of the pay lines in the normal gaming state. The second replay is won when the combination of “BAR-replay-replay” is completed. The third replay is won when the combination of "black 7-replay-replay" is complete. When the replay wins, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the bet number again, so three medals corresponding to the bet number that has become unnecessary in the next game will be paid out. Is substantially the same as.

When the combination of "net 7-net 7-black 7" is aligned on any of the pay lines in the normal gaming state, the RB wins and the gaming state shifts to RB. The RB is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the small role, especially the bell is increased, which is more advantageous to the player than the other gaming states. When the RB starts, 12 games are exhausted, or 8 games are won ( The type of role can be either), whichever comes first, whichever comes first.

BB is a combination of "black 7-black 7-black 7", a combination of "net 7-net 7-net 7", or "white 7-white 7-white 7" in any of the winning lines in the normal game state. The prize is awarded when the combination of When BB wins, the game state shifts to BB and simultaneously shifts to RB. When RB ends, if BB is not finished, it shifts to RB again and is repeatedly controlled to RB until BB is finished. It During BB, it is always controlled by RB. Then, the BB ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB exceeds 465. When the BB ends, the RB also ends regardless of whether the RB end condition is satisfied.

In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the winning of each of the above-mentioned winning combinations is allowed (before the start switch 7 is detected) before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. To do. In the internal lottery, first, when the start switch 7 is detected, a random number value for the internal lottery (an integer of 0 to 65535) is acquired. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not a special combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work and the determination of each combination determined according to the game state, the bet number, and the set value It is done according to the number of values.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the winning combination of the internal lottery differs depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RB or BB. Furthermore, when the game state is the normal game state, the winning combination for the internal lottery differs depending on whether or not the special winning combination is being carried over. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special combination has been carried over, BB, RB, replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read as target combinations for the internal lottery. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and one of the special roles has been carried over, replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read as the target roles of the internal lottery. When the gaming state is RB (including in BB), watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read as the target combination of the internal lottery.

In the present embodiment, an example is described in which three types of symbol combinations corresponding to BB, three types of symbol combinations corresponding to replay, and two types of symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon are set, but the internal lottery is performed. Then, each symbol combination is read as a target winning combination. For example, for BB, a combination of "black 7-black 7-black 7", a combination of "net 7-net 7-net 7", and a combination of "white 7-white 7-white 7" are targets of the internal lottery. Are read out in sequence. Regarding replays, the first to third replays are sequentially read out as target combinations for the internal lottery. The watermelons are also sequentially read as target winning combinations for each symbol combination.

The symbol combinations corresponding to BB are 3 types, the symbol combinations corresponding to replay are 3 types, and the symbol combinations corresponding to watermelons are 2 types are not limited to being read as target combinations for each symbol combination. All the symbol combinations of a plurality of types may be read as one target winning combination. For example, when a replay is read as a target combination and a winning combination is won, it is possible to allow all of the first to third replays to stop on the pay line.

The number of judgment values used in the internal lottery is set for each symbol combination corresponding to the set values 1 to 6. The winning rate is set for each symbol combination in correspondence with the set values 1 to 6. Therefore, in the internal lottery, the derivation (occurrence) of the symbol combination is allowed according to the winning rate determined for each symbol combination corresponding to the set value.

In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined corresponding to the winning combination of the internal lottery, the current game state and the set value is sequentially added to the random number value for the internal lottery (the value of the lottery work) and added. When the result of (1) overflows, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Therefore, the winning combination is won with a probability (the number of judgment values/65536) according to the size of the number of judgment values.

[Reel stop control]
Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

In the present embodiment, when one of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum on the winning line within a range of 4 frames, and the winning combination is drawn so as not to be aligned on the winning line. While creating a stop control table that defines the number of sliding pieces and controlling the reels to stop, if none of the winning combinations has been won, the stopping control that defines the number of sliding pieces is not available. Create a table and control the reel stop. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop the winning combination within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, the control for stopping the winning combination is performed, and the winning is achieved. The winning combination is controlled to stop without aligning within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames.

When a small role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, such as when a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, control to align the small role on the winning line rather than the special role It is possible to win a special role only when priority is given and the small role cannot be drawn. In addition, when a special combination and a small combination can be drawn in at the same time, only the small combination is drawn in, and the small combination is not aligned with the special combination on the pay line.

When a special role and a small role are won at the same time, the control of aligning the special role on the winning line is given priority over the small role, and the small role is placed on the winning line only when the special role cannot be drawn. Alignment control may be performed.

If a special player and a re-gaming player win at the same time, such as when the special player has been carried over from the previous game or before, the special game and the re-gaming player are elected at the same time. The control of stopping and aligning the symbols of the re-play combination is performed within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-game combination or the symbols constituting the re-game combination to be simultaneously won are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Since it can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of the pieces, if a special combination and a re-gaming combination are simultaneously won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. Be sure to win all the re-playing roles. In such a case, the control of aligning the re-gaming combination on the pay line is prioritized over the special combination, and the re-gaming combination is always won. In addition, when the special combination and the re-game combination can be drawn in at the same time, only the re-play combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not aligned with the re-play combination on the pay line.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a winning combination corresponding to the winning line has been completed on the activated pay line when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped due to the stop operation. When it is determined that the winning combination corresponding to any of the prizes is prepared, the control at the time of winning is performed. For example, when the small winning combination is complete, control for giving a medal according to the small winning combination is performed, and for the re-playing combination, control for giving a replay game is performed.

[command]
Next, a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 instructs the effect control board 90 to have a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, A plurality of types of commands including a game state command, a setting start command, a confirmation start command, a setting end command, a mode selection start command, a mode identification command, and a mode selection end command are transmitted.

The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals (the number of medals used to set the number of bets) and whether or not a BET sound is output. The BET command is the state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, and when a prescribed number of bets is not set, a medal is inserted or a single BET switch 5 or a MAXBET switch 6 is placed. Is transmitted when the bet number is set by operating the.

The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits and the type of sound to be output (BET sound or credit sound). The credit command is a state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, and is transmitted when a medal is inserted and credits are added in a state where a prescribed number of bets is set.

The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result. The internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation. The reel rotation start command is transmitted when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started.

The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel. Is. The reel stop command is transmitted each time stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed.

The winning determination command is a command capable of specifying whether or not there is a winning, the type of winning, and the number of paid-out medals at the time of winning. The prize determination command is transmitted after all reels are stopped and the prize determination is performed.

The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals. The payout start command is transmitted when payout of medals is started by winning a prize or adjusting the amount of credits (including medals used for setting the bet number).

The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals. The payout end command is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and settlement of credits is completed.

The gaming state command is a command that can specify the current gaming state (normal gaming state, winning, RB). The gaming state command is transmitted at the end of the game.

The setting start command is a command that can specify that the setting change operation for setting the payout rate is performed and shifts to the setting change state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting change state.

The confirmation start command is a command that can specify the shift to the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting confirmation state.

The setting end command is a command that can specify that the setting change state is ended, and is transmitted when the setting change state is ended.

The mode selection start command is a command that can specify the transition to the mode selection state of whether or not to set the power saving mode for suppressing power consumption, and is transmitted when transitioning to the mode selection state.

The mode specifying command is a command that can specify the selected mode, and is transmitted when it is selected whether or not to set the power saving mode in the mode selected state.

The mode selection end command is a command that can specify the end of the mode selection state, and is transmitted when ending the mode selection state.

When a new command is received during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. Perform an effect based on the control pattern. Even if the effect is not completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the bet number setting operation is performed during execution of the effect, that is, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a BET command (with a BET sound) of the BET commands, it is being executed. Stop production. Therefore, when the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the effect to the end, the effect can be canceled. As a result, the player who wants to proceed to the next game faster than the production does not feel annoyed. When the BET command (with a BET sound) of the BET commands is received, the sub-control unit 91 outputs a predetermined BET sound (for example, a sound effect “beep!”) to the speaker 53, the number of times corresponding to the number of bets. 54 to output.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a BET command (no BET sound) out of the BET commands, the sub-control unit 91 continues the BET sound without outputting it from the speakers 53 and 54 and without stopping the effect being executed. .. When the BET command is received, regardless of the type, the effect being executed may be canceled and the BET sound may be output.

When receiving the credit command (normal) of the credit commands, the sub control unit 91 causes the speakers 53 and 54 to output a predetermined credit sound (for example, a sound effect “D!”). This can make it easier to notice that the credit has been given.

When receiving the credit command (with BET sound) of the credit commands, the sub control unit 91 causes the speakers 53 and 54 to output the same sound as the BET sound (for example, a sound effect “Pip!”).

When a credit or bet number adjustment operation is performed during execution of the effect, that is, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a payout start command for notifying adjustment, as a general rule, the effect currently being executed is stopped, The production state (display state of the liquid crystal display 51, sound effect from the speakers 53, 54, etc.) is set to the customer waiting state. It is when ending the game to settle credits and bets, and in such a case, by ending the running production, there is an intention to end the game, but the production continues unnecessarily. It is designed so that it will not stumble.

However, when the payout start command for notifying the credit settlement in the replay game is received among the payout start commands for notifying the settlement, the bet number set by the replay winning remains, and at least one game is executed thereafter. Therefore, the production being executed is continued after that (the customer does not enter the waiting state).

Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described below.
[Game processing]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game processing executed by the main control unit 41 after the setting is changed. In the game process, a BET process (S1), an internal lottery process (S2), a reel rotation process (S3), a winning determination process (S4), a payout process (S5), and a game end process (S6) are sequentially executed, When the ending process is completed, the process returns to the BET process again.

In the BET processing in S1, the main control unit 41 waits in a state in which the bet number can be set, sets a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state, and starts the game when the start switch 7 is operated. Execute the process. As a process for starting the game, the main control unit 41 sets, in the RAM 41c, an output command for instructing the output of the medal IN signals for the number of medals used for the set bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

In the internal lottery process in S2, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to allow winning of each winning combination, based on the random number value for internal lottery latched at the same time as the game is started by the detection of the start switch 7 in S1. Perform processing to In this internal lottery process, the winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

In the reel rotation processing in S3, the main control unit 41 rotates the respective reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the corresponding reel 2L in response to the player's operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R being detected, The process of stopping the rotation of 2C and 2R is executed.

In the winning determination process of S4, the main control unit 41 executes a process of determining whether or not a winning is generated according to the display result derived to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

In the payout process in S5, when it is determined in S4 that a prize has been won, the main control unit 41 adds credits and medals based on the number of payouts according to the type of the small win when the winning is a small win. In the case of a replay combination, a replay game flag that can specify the type of the replay combination is set in the RAM 41c so that the replay game can be given. In the payout process, the main control unit 41 sets, in the RAM 41c, an output command for instructing the output of medals OUT signals for the number of medals given to the player by adding credits and paying out medals.

In the game end process in S6, the main control unit 41 executes a process of setting a game state in preparation for the next game. In the game end process, a command is generated according to the progress control of the game, and is set in the normal command transmission buffer, so that the command set in the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Will be sent.

[BET processing]
Next, the BET process executed by the main control unit 41 in S1 of the game process will be described. 7 to 9 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET processing executed by the main control unit 41.

In the BET processing, the main control unit 41 first clears the value of the BET counter in which the value of the bet number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (S10), and sets the specified number according to the gaming state in the RAM 41c (S11). ), based on whether or not the replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the next game (game to be started now) is a replay game (S12).

When the main control unit 41 determines that the next game (the game to be started from now) is the replay game (Y in S12), whether the replay combination winning in the previous game is the first replay. It is determined whether or not (S13). Whether or not it was the first replay is specified from the set replay game flag.

When the main control unit 41 determines that it is the first replay (Y in S13), the bet number is increased by 3 (because the replay winning state is a bet of 3 cards), and the sub control unit. A BET command indicating that there is a BET sound indicating that a BET sound is to be output by 91 (in S14, for convenience, is shown as "BET command (with BET sound). The same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S14). ..

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the replay is not the first replay, that is, when the replay is the second or third replay (N in S13), the bet number is incremented by 3, and the sub control unit A BET command indicating that there is no BET sound indicating that no BET sound is to be output by 91 (for convenience sake, is shown as "BET command (no BET sound)") is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S15). The set BET command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

As a result, the sub-control unit 91 outputs the BET sound each time the bet number is set after the first replay winning, whereas the bet number is set after the second or third replay winning. BET sound is not output when playing. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily notice the first replay prize, while making it difficult for the player to notice the second or third replay prize.

Next, the main control unit 41 increments the value of the BET counter by 1 (S16), refers to the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c, and determines whether the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (here, 3). It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the number of bets which is the condition for starting the game is set (S17), and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number (N in S17), the process returns to S16.

When the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number and the setting of the bet number by the replay winning is completed (Y in S17), the main control unit 41 proceeds to S18. After the value of the BET counter is added, the main control unit 41 executes a process of sequentially lighting the 1BETLED 14, the 2BETLED 15, and the 3BETLED 16 according to the value of the BET counter. After the setting of the number of bets after the winning of the replay is completed, the main control unit 41 executes a process of turning on the LED 20 during the replay and the start valid LED 18 (LED 19 during the wait during the wait).

The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the value of the credit counter, which is the value of the credit stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, is 50, which is the upper limit value (S18). When it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (Y in S18), the closing prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c (S19), and the process proceeds to S21. When the closing prohibition flag is set, processing for turning off the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 is performed. When the BET counter is set to a prescribed number by the second or third replay winning, the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are not turned off, for example, after being determined to be Y in S37 or for 3BET. After the credit command (with BET sound) corresponding to is output, the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned off.

When the main control unit 41 determines that it is not the upper limit value, that is, when it is determined that credit can be inserted (N in S18), the process proceeds to S20. If the main control unit 41 determines that the game is not a replay game (N in S12), the process directly proceeds to S20.

In S20, the main control unit 41 performs the setting before the wait for insertion and proceeds to S21. In the setting before the insertion wait, when the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c, the insertion prohibition flag is cleared, and the medal can be inserted. Therefore, after the replay winning, the medals thrown in before the setting of the bet number is completed and the setting before the waiting for insertion has not been made yet, and the setting of the bet number is completed and it is inserted. After the setting before waiting is made, the inserted medals are effectively accepted and credits are added.

The main control unit 41 lights the throw-in request LED 17 after the setting before the throwing-in wait is performed and clears the throw-in prohibition flag, and lights the BET switch valid LED 21 when the bet number can be set. Execute the process. When the BET counter is set to the specified number by the first replay winning, the main control unit 41 lights only the insertion request LED 17 in S20. When the BET counter is set to the specified number by the second or third replay winning, the main control unit 41 turns on the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 in S20, and after it is determined to be Y in S37, for example. Alternatively, after the credit command (with BET sound) corresponding to 3 BETs is output, the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned off.

The main control unit 41 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set (S21). When determining that the medal can be inserted (Y in S21), the main control unit 41 turns on the power of the flow path switching solenoid 30 and sets the medal flow path to the path on the hopper tank side. As a result, a medal can be inserted (S22), and the process proceeds to S24. When the main control unit 41 determines that it is not possible to insert medals (N in S21), the power of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set to the medal payout opening 9 side. The insertion of new medals is prohibited as a route (S23), and the process proceeds to S24.

The main controller 41 determines whether the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state, and if the setting key switch 37 is ON (Y in S24), determines whether the value of the BET counter is 0 or not. (S25). If the value of the BET counter is 0 (Y in S25), the main control unit 41 sets the confirmation start command in the normal command transmission buffer (S26), and performs the setting confirmation process (S27), that is, the setting confirmation state. To do. The confirmation start command set in S26 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). After completing the setting confirmation process in S27, the main control unit 41 returns to S21. When the setting key switch 37 is not ON (N in S24) or the value of the BET counter is not 0 (N in S25), the main control unit 41 proceeds to S30.

The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the detection result by the input medal sensor 31 becomes a proper detection result and whether the insertion of the inserted medal is detected, that is, the presence or absence of the insertion medal flag indicating that the passage of the inserted medal is detected. (S30). If the passing of inserted medals has not been detected (N in S30), the main control unit 41 proceeds to S45, and if the passage of inserted medals has been detected (Y in S30), clears the inserted medal flag (S31). ), it is determined whether or not the medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c (S32). The main controller 41. If it is not possible to insert medals (N in S32), the process proceeds to S45.

When the medal can be inserted (Y in S32), the main control unit 41 refers to the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c and determines whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number. (S33). If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number (N in S33), the main control unit 41 indicates that the bet number is incremented by 1 and that there is a BET sound indicating that the sub control unit 91 outputs the BET sound. The BET command (with BET sound) is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S34), the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (S35), and the process returns to S21. The BET command set in S34 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). As a result, when the number of bets is set by inserting medals, the BET sound is output on the sub-control unit 91 side.

If the value of the BET counter is the specified number (Y in S33), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the second or third replay was won in the previous game (S36). Whether it was the second or third replay is specified from the replay game flag. When determining that the second or third replay was not won in the previous game (N in S36), the main control unit 41 indicates the value of the credit counter after adding 1, and the sub control unit 91 outputs the credit sound. A credit command (indicated as "credit command (normal)" for convenience in S38. The same applies hereinafter) indicating that the credit is to be output is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S38), and the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (S40). The credit command set in S38 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

When determining that the second or third replay was won in the previous game (Y in S36), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the specified number of BET sounds have been output (S37). Specifically, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the credit command shown in S39 has been output three times for the specified number. When the number of bets is set after the second or third replay winning, the BET command (no BET sound) is output as shown in S15, so that the BET sound is not output in the sub control unit 91. Therefore, after the second or third replay winning, after the bet number is set, a process for outputting the BET sound up to a prescribed number of times is performed when a medal is inserted and credited.

When the specified number of BET sounds are not output (N in S37), the main control unit 41 indicates the value of the credit counter after adding 1, and the sub control unit 91 outputs a credit command indicating that the credit sound is to be output. (In S39, for convenience, it is indicated as "credit command (with BET sound). The same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S39), and the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c is set to 1. Add (S40). The credit command set in S39 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

On the other hand, when the specified number of BET sounds are already output (Y in S37), the main control unit 41 sets the credit command (normal) in the normal command transmission buffer (S38). As a result, when credits are added by inserting medals after the second or third replay, the BET sound is output up to the third sheet and the credit sound is displayed for the fourth and subsequent sheets on the sub-control unit 91 side. Is output. On the other hand, when credits are added by inserting medals when not after the second or third replay prize, the sub controller 91 outputs the credit sound from the first coin.

As a step following S36 and S37, by executing S40 and then performing the corresponding process of S38 or S39, the credit command indicating the current value after addition in S40 as the value of the credit counter is displayed in S38. Alternatively, it may be set in S39.

The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50, which is the upper limit value (S41). If the value of the credit counter is not 50 (N in S41), the main control unit 41 returns to S21, and if the value of the credit counter is 50 (Y in S41), sets the insertion prohibition flag in the RAM 41c (S42). ), and returns to S21.

The main controller 41 determines whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the start switch 7 is set (S45). Further, the rising edge is set only when any of the switches is turned ON and all the switches are turned OFF. Therefore, in S45, in addition to whether or not any of the switches is turned ON, other It is also determined whether or not the switch is OFF.

If the main control unit 41 determines that the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected (N in S45), or if the start switch 7 is operated but other switches are also operated, the process proceeds to S50. If the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected (Y in S45), the process proceeds to S46 to clear the rising edge. The main control unit 41 refers to the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c, and determines whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number, that is, whether or not the number of bets that is the start condition of the game is set. (S47).

If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number (N in S47), the main control unit 41 returns to S21, and if the value of the BET counter is the specified number (Y in S47), sets the thrown-disable flag in the RAM 41c. At the same time, the power of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off (S48), the flow of medals is set as a path on the side of the medal payout opening 9 to prohibit insertion of new medals, and setting at the start of the game is made (S49). .. As a result, even if a medal is inserted, it will not be accepted until the game is ended after the game is started and the setting before the insertion wait is made in S20 in the BET processing of the next game and thereafter, and the medal payout port 9 Will be paid out from. After S49, the BET process is ended and the process proceeds to S2 in FIG.

The main controller 41 determines whether or not the operation of the single-sheet BET switch 5 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the single-sheet BET switch 5 is set (S50). If the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5 is not detected (N in S50), the main control section 41 proceeds to S51, and if the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5 is detected (Y in S50), the process shown in FIG. In S65, the rising edge is cleared.

The main control unit 41 refers to the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c, and determines whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (S66). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number (Y in S66), the main control unit 41 returns to S21. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number (N in S66), the value of the credit counter is 0. It is determined whether or not (S67). If the value of the credit counter is 0 (Y in S67), the main control unit 41 returns to S21. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 (N in S67), 1 is added to the number of bets, and a BET command indicating that a BET sound is output by the sub control unit 91 (there is a BET sound) Is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S68).

The main controller 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the credit counter (S69), adds 1 to the value of the BET counter (S70), and returns to S21. The BET command set in S68 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Thus, when the bet number is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5, a BET sound is output on the sub-control unit 91 side. After the second or third replay prize, when Y is determined in S66, the same determination as in S37 is performed, and when the specified number of BET sounds are not output, the same processing as S39 is performed. In this way, the BET sound may be output.

The main controller 41 determines whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the MAXBET switch 6 is set (S51). If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected (N in S51), the main control unit 41 proceeds to S52, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected (Y in S51), proceeds to S75 in FIG. , Clear the rising edge.

The main controller 41 refers to the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c, and determines whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number (S76). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number (Y in S76), the main control unit 41 proceeds to S80. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number (N in S76), the value of the credit counter is 0. It is determined whether or not (S77). If the value of the credit counter is 0 (Y in S77), the main control unit 41 proceeds to S80. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 (N in S77), the main control unit 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the credit counter in S78, adds 1 to the value of the BET counter in S79, and returns to S76.

The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the BET counter has been added (S80). If the BET counter has not been added (N in S80), the process returns to S21. On the other hand, if the BET counter is added (Y in S80), the main control unit 41 indicates that the bet number has been added by the added number and that the sub control unit 91 outputs the BET sound. A BET command indicating that there is sound (with BET sound) is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S81), and the process proceeds to S21. The BET command set in S81 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). As a result, when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, the BET sound corresponding to the set bet number is output on the sub-control unit 91 side.

The main controller 41 determines whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the settlement switch 10 is set (S52). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 has not been detected (N in S52), the main control unit 41 returns to S21. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 has been detected (Y in S52), the process proceeds to S53 and the rising edge. To clear. The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c (S54).

When it is not determined that the game is a replay game (N in S54), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (S56), and if the value of the BET counter is not 0 (in S56). N), proceeding to S57, controlling the hopper motor 34b to drive out medals corresponding to the value stored in the BET counter (return the medals used for setting the bet number and set the BET counter value to 0). Control) is performed, and a bet number adjustment process for setting a payout start command for notifying the start of payout of medals and the bet amount adjustment in the normal command transmission buffer. After the bet amount adjustment process in S57, the main control unit 41 clears the throw-in prohibition flag set in the RAM 41c (S58), and returns to S21. As a result, when the bet number is settled by operating the settlement switch 10 in a state where the bet number is set, not after the replay winning, the sub-control unit 91 displays that the bet number is being settled. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the bet number adjustment is output.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines in S54 that the game is a replay game or when the value of the BET counter is 0 in S56, the main control unit 41 drives the hopper motor 34b to change the value to the credit counter in S59. Control for paying out medals for the stored value (control for returning medals stored as credits and setting the value of the credit counter to 0), notifying the start of payout of medals, and credit in the replay game A bet number adjustment process is performed to set a payout start command for notifying a payment or a credit adjustment when the bet number is not set in the normal command transmission buffer.

After the bet amount adjustment process in S57, the main control unit 41 clears the throw-in prohibition flag set in the RAM 41c (S58), and returns to S22. Accordingly, when the replay prize is settled by operating the settlement switch 10, only the credit settlement is made without the bet number settling, and the sub-control unit 91 side provides the credit after the replay winning. A message indicating that the payment is being made is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the credit payment after the replay winning is output. When the settlement is performed by operating the settlement switch 10 when the value of the BET counter is 0, it is displayed on the sub-control unit 91 that the credit settlement is being performed when the value of the BET counter is 0. In addition, a sound corresponding to the credit settlement when the value of the BET counter is 0 is output.

[Timing at which medals can be inserted or settled after the game ends]
Next, description will be made regarding the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the game is over. FIGS. 10A to 10D are views for explaining an example of the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the game is finished by executing the BET process shown in FIGS. 7 to 9. Is.

FIG. 10A is a diagram for explaining the timing when the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the small winning combination has not been won and the medals have not been paid out. If the small winning combination has not occurred, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the process of S6 of FIG. 6, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 of FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S20 is executed, so that the insertion or settlement of medals is permitted as shown in FIG.

FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the small winning combination has been won and the medals have been paid out. If a small winning combination has occurred, the game ends after the payout is performed, and thereafter, the processing of S6 of FIG. 6 and the processing of S1 for the next game, and of S10 to S12 of FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S20 is executed, so that the insertion or settlement of medals is permitted as shown in FIG.

FIG. 10C is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the replay prize has been won. If a replay prize has occurred, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the process of S6 of FIG. 6, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 of FIG. In addition to, after the timing when the bet number setting is completed (that is, at the timing when the bet number setting is completed, or after the timing) and it is determined in S19 that the credit is possible, the processing of S20 and the subsequent steps. By executing, the insertion or settlement of medals is permitted as shown in FIG.

As described above, as shown in S12 to S20 of FIG. 7 and FIG. 10(c), it is a medal inserted after the replay winning occurs and before the start of the replay game (start of reel rotation). Even if the bet number is set by the replay winning (automatic BET) and the medal is detected after the next replay game is ready to start, the medal is detected in S36 of FIG. ~S40 is performed and can be added to the credit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the credit addition after the replay winning occurs from being set before the bet number setting. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay prize is generated, without making the player feel uncomfortable.

As shown in S52 to S59 of FIG. 8, when the bet number is set in accordance with the operation of the settlement switch 10, the bet number settlement process for adjusting the bet number is executed to set the bet number. If the bet number set is the bet number automatically bet by the replay winning, the bet number setting process is not executed when the set bet number is the bet number automatically set when the replay winning is made. Execute credit settlement processing. As a result, the replay function itself of giving a replay game (one game) instead of paying out medals is retained and the significance of existence of the replay is maintained, while the credit can be adjusted even after the replay prize is won. By making the payout possible, the convenience of the player after the replay winning can be further improved.

According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following problems can be solved. In a conventional slot machine, generally, the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is a predetermined time (for example, 190 ms (millisecond). )) is restricted. For this reason, when providing a winning combination that does not drop out regardless of the operation timing, the winning combination is within a range (within this embodiment, 5 frames or less) in which each reel can be pulled in within a predetermined time. It is necessary to place the design pattern. As a result, the greater the number of winning combinations that do not drop out, the more types of dedicated symbols that make up each winning combination.

On the other hand, the symbols as identification information drawn on a plurality (usually three) of reels cannot be provided infinitely, and some restrictions are imposed. For example, the number of symbols drawn on each of the three reels is limited to a maximum of 21 per reel, and the types of symbols drawn on the three reels are limited to a maximum of 10 in total.

When such a conventional slot machine is used as a background, for example, when it is attempted to configure the winning symbol with the same symbol, it is necessary to prepare a dedicated symbol. For this reason, it may be difficult in design to provide a dedicated symbol for a transition combination within the limit of the number and type of symbols. In the case of configuring to be able to win the replay regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (pushing order, operation timing, etc.), a special symbol that constitutes the replay within a range that can be drawn in within a predetermined time Had to be arranged, and there was no choice but to increase the number of dedicated symbols, which could make design more and more difficult.

In order to solve such a problem, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "replay-replay-replay" composed only of symbols having the same outer shape is stopped at the winning line for the re-gaming combination. The first replay caused by that, and the "BAR-replay-replay" or "black 7-replay-replay" that includes a pattern whose outer shape is not the same or similar to each other is generated by being stopped on the winning line. 2 and a third replay. As a result, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of dedicated symbols for replay, it is possible to avoid increasing the number and types of symbols, and within the limits of the number, types, and arrangement of symbols, the type of replay (variation ) Can be abundant. On the other hand, when the second or third replay prize is generated, the combination including the symbols whose outer shapes are not the same or similar is stopped, so that the replay prize of the first replay prize is higher than that of the case where the first replay prize is generated. It is more likely that you will insert a medal without noticing the occurrence, but since the credit can be added according to the detected medal, the player feels the annoyance that the inserted medal is not accepted. The game can be advanced without causing it.

The symbols constituting the third replay in the present embodiment include “black 7” constituting BB different from the replay. For this reason, it is more likely that a medal will be thrown in without noticing the occurrence of the third replay prize due to, for example, a disappointment such as not winning the BB. Since credits can be added in accordance with the above, the game can be advanced without causing the player to feel bothersome that the inserted medal cannot be accepted.

As shown in S13 to S15 of FIG. 7, since the BET command (with BET sound) is set and output after the first replay winning occurs, the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 side. It On the other hand, since the BET command (no BET sound) is set and output after the second or third replay winning occurs, the BET sound is not output by the sub control unit 91 side. As a result, it is more likely that a second or third replay prize will be generated and a medal will be inserted without noticing that the bet number setting has been completed, but the credit depending on the detected medal. It is possible to add, and the game can be advanced without causing the player to feel bothersome that the inserted medal cannot be accepted.

As shown in S36 to S39 of FIG. 8, a credit is added by inserting a medal without noticing that the second or third replay prize in which the BET sound is not output is generated and the bet number setting is completed. Even in the case of playing, the same sound as the BET sound is output up to 3 times corresponding to the upper limit number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or discomfort by not outputting the BET sound even though the player intends to set the bet number by inserting the medal. it can.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10C, an example has been described in which the timing at which the insertion (credit) and settlement after the replay winning is allowed is the time when the automatic BET by the replay winning is completed. However, not limited to this, the timing at which the insertion (credit) and the settlement after the replay winning is allowed may be when the automatic BET by the replay winning is started (or started).

FIG. 10D is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the game is over. As shown in FIG. 10D, when the replay prize is generated, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the process of S6 of FIG. 6 and S1 for the next game are performed. After the processing and the processing of S10 to S12 of FIG. 7, the processing of automatic BET (S16, S17) is started. That is, since the start of the automatic BET processing (S16, S17) is determined after the processing of S10 to S12 of FIG. 7, it can be said that the automatic BET processing is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10D, when the automatic BET process is started (or started), the insertion or settlement of medals may be permitted.

As a first example, for example, when Y is determined in S12 of FIG. 7, the same process as in S18 is performed to determine whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50, and then the automatic BET process is performed. (S16 and S17) and after the credit counter value is determined not to be 50, the process of S20 is started without waiting for the completion of the automatic BET process started thereafter. The credit may be added when the inserted medals are detected after performing the same processing, and the credit may be settled when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. On the other hand, after performing the same processing as S18 and determining that the value of the credit counter is 50, the same processing as the processing after S19 may be performed.

As a second example, for example, when it is determined that the interrupt process for inserting or setting up medals can be executed and the value of the credit counter in the first example is not 50, or the value of the credit counter is After it is determined that the value is not 50, the interruption of the interrupt processing is permitted during the period from the execution of the first processing corresponding to S16 to the start of the game, and the interruption is performed every predetermined period (2 msec). The insertion process may be executed to allow the insertion or settlement of medals when the automatic BET process is started (or started).

Even with such a configuration, even if a medal was inserted after the replay prize was generated and before the replay game was started (reel rotation start), the bet number setting by the replay prize was set. When the medal is detected after (automatic BET) is started, the credit can be added according to the detection of the medal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the credit addition after the occurrence of the replay winning from being performed before the start of the bet number setting. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay prize is generated, without making the player feel uncomfortable. Replay function (1 game) is given instead of paying out medals, but the replay function itself is retained, while the significance of existence of replay is maintained, while credit can be paid out according to settlement operation even after replay winning By doing so, it is possible to further improve the convenience of the player after winning the replay.

[Store side payout rate setting process]
The store-side payout rate setting process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. The store-side payout rate setting process is a process executed when a store clerk changes the set value of the payout rate.

The main controller 41 determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 has been turned on (S110). That is, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state when the power of the slot machine 1 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state. Alternatively, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 has been switched to the ON state while the slot machine 1 is powered on. When determining that the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state (N in S110), the main control unit 41 ends the store side payout rate setting process.

On the other hand, when determining that the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Y in S110), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the door opening detection switch 25 is in the ON state (S111). That is, the main controller 41 determines whether or not the front door 1b closes the opened front side of the housing 1a. When determining that the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state, that is, the front door 1b is closed (Y in S111), the main control unit 41 ends the store-side payout rate setting process.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the door open detection switch 25 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1b is open (N in S111), the sub control unit 91 shifts to the setting change state. A setting start command that can specify that to be performed is transmitted (S112). After that, the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting change state (S113).

In the setting change state, the main control unit 41 reads the current set value from the RAM 41c, converts the read set value into a display value (S114), and displays the converted display value on the set value display 24 (S115). .. After that, the main control unit 41 determines whether the reset/setting switch 38 has been operated by the store clerk (S116). When determining that the reset/setting switch 38 has been operated within the predetermined period (Y in S116), the main control unit 41 updates the display value by 1 (S117), and displays the updated display value on the set value display 24. It is displayed (S115).

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the reset/setting switch 38 has not been operated within the predetermined period (N in S116), it determines whether the start switch 7 has been operated (S118). When determining that the start switch 7 has not been operated within the predetermined period (N in S118), the main control unit 41 returns to the process of S116.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the start switch 7 has been operated within the predetermined period (Y in S118), the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is converted into the set value and stored in the RAM 41c. Yes (S119).

Next, the main control unit 41 transmits a setting end command capable of specifying that the setting change state is to be ended to the sub control unit 91 (S120). After that, the main control unit 41 ends the constant change state (S121), and ends the store side payout rate setting process.

In this way, since only the store clerk can open the front door 1b, the store clerk operates the setting key switch 37, which cannot be operated by anyone other than the store clerk, thereby setting the payout rate, which greatly affects the profitability of the game. can do. That is, the payout rate can be set on the condition that the slot machine 1 is powered on, the front door 1b is opened, and the setting key switch 37 is operated.

Here, even if the front door 1b is closed, the setting key switch 37 is operated by inserting a thin instrument such as wire through the gap between the housing 1a and the front door 1b, or the housing 1a and the front door 1b are closed. There is a possibility that the same situation as when the setting key switch 37 is operated by using a special machine to pry open the gap of the tool with a tool.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the setting key switch 37 is operated by such a fraudulent act, setting of the payout rate is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed, so that the payout rate is set. Can be prevented from being illegally performed.

[Store side effect setting process]
The store side effect setting process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The store side effect setting process is a process executed when a store clerk changes a setting that is a reference of an effect mode during a game. By executing the store-side effect setting process, the store clerk sets the reference volume level in the effect (first volume step) and the reference light level in the effect (first light level step). can do. Further, by performing the store side effect setting process, the store clerk can set the normal mode in which the power is not saved or the power save mode in which the power is saved.

The main control unit 41 determines whether the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 has been switched (S130). When determining that the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 has been switched (Y in S130), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the door opening detection switch 25 is in the ON state (S131). When determining that the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state, that is, the front door 1b is closed (Y in S131), the main control unit 41 ends the store side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when determining that the door open detection switch 25 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1b is open (N in S131), the main control unit 41 sets the reference size of the volume and the light amount in the effect. , And the first volume level and the first light level corresponding to the channel setting after switching (S132). The first volume level and the first light intensity level set at this time are not immediately reflected in the volume and light intensity of the effect, and then the setting screen is displayed when the player operates the player side setting switch 70. It is reflected when displayed. After that, the main control unit 41 ends the store side effect setting process.

In this way, since only the store clerk can open the front door 1b, the store clerk operates the store-side setting switch 60, which cannot be operated by anyone other than the store clerk, and serves as a reference for the volume and the light amount in the performance during the game. You can set the size. That is, the standard setting of the volume and the light amount can be performed on condition that the slot machine 1 is powered on, the front door 1b is opened, and the store side setting switch 60 is operated.

Here, even if the front door 1b is closed, for example, a store-side setting switch 60 is operated by passing a thin instrument such as wire through the gap between the housing 1a and the front door 1b, or the housing 1a and the front door 1b. There is a possibility that the same situation as when the store side setting switch 60 is operated using a special machine by prying the gap of 1b with a tool is created.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the store-side setting switch 60 is operated by such a fraudulent act, the reference setting of the volume and the light amount is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the standard setting of the light amount and the light amount from being illegally set, and it is possible to prevent the standard setting of the volume and the light amount to be performed with a content not intended by the store clerk.

When determining that the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 has not been switched (N in S130), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not all the stop switches have been pressed and held at the same time (S133). When determining that all the stop switches have not been pressed at the same time (N in S133), the main control unit 41 ends the store side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when determining that all the stop switches have been pressed and held at the same time (Y in S133), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state (S134). When determining that the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state, that is, the front door 1b is closed (Y in S134), the main control unit 41 ends the store side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the door open detection switch 25 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1b is open (N in S134), it shifts to the mode selection state for the sub control unit 91. A mode selection start command that can specify that the operation is performed is transmitted (S135).

In the mode selected state, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the store clerk selects the normal mode or the power saving mode (S136). When determining that any one of the modes has been selected within the predetermined period (Y in S136), the main control unit 41 sets the selected mode (S137). After that, the main controller 41 transmits a mode specifying command capable of specifying the selected mode to the sub controller 91 (S138). Thereby, the sub control unit 91 controls various effect means according to the selected mode. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the number of LEDs used for the effect is reduced or the light amount of the LEDs is decreased as compared with the normal mode.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that no mode has been selected within the predetermined period (N in S136), or after transmitting the mode specifying command, it determines whether or not the end operation has been performed (S139). ). This ending operation is performed by pressing the start switch 7 for a long time. When determining that the ending operation has not been performed within the predetermined period (N in S139), the main control unit 41 returns to the process of S136.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the start switch 7 has been pressed and held within the predetermined period (Y in S139), the sub control unit 91 can specify that the mode selection state is to be terminated. The command is transmitted (S140), and the store side effect setting process ends.

In this way, the store clerk can press and hold all the stop switches at the same time to set the power saving mode. That is, the power saving mode can be set on condition that the slot machine 1 is powered on, the front door 1b is opened, and all the stop switches are pressed and held at the same time.

Here, since the stop switch is arranged outside the front door 1b, even a player other than a store clerk can operate the stop switch. Therefore, during the game, the player may abruptly press and hold all the stop switches at the same time, and the power saving mode may be set.

However, in the present embodiment, even if all the stop switches are pressed and held at the same time, the setting of the power saving mode is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. It is possible to prevent the setting from being performed.

[Volume and light intensity setting screen]
The setting screen of the volume and the light amount will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the player operates the player-side setting switch 70 to display a setting screen for adjusting the volume and the light amount on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. It

On the setting screen, in the volume setting area 52a, the numbers "2" to "14" (the larger the number, the larger the volume) corresponding to the volume level (second volume level) that can be set by the player are displayed. It This is also called volume display. Further, among the numbers “2” to “14”, the number corresponding to the currently set volume is highlighted (blinking display, display for changing the color of the selected item, etc.). The player can change the second volume level by moving the highlighted display by performing a predetermined change operation. For example, the player can operate the stop switch 8R to move the highlight to the right to raise the second volume level, while operating the stop switch 8L to move the highlight to the left. The second volume level can be lowered.

On the setting screen, in the light amount setting area 52b, the numbers of "50%", "75%", and "100%" (the larger one is larger) corresponding to the light amount stage (second light amount stage) that can be set by the player. Has a large amount of light) is displayed. This is also called light quantity display. Further, among the numbers “50%”, “75%”, and “100%”, the number corresponding to the currently set light amount is highlighted (blinking display, display for changing the color of the selected item, etc.). It The player can change the second light amount stage by moving the highlighted display by performing a predetermined change operation. For example, the player can operate the stop switch 8R to move the highlighted display to the right to raise the second light level, while operating the stop switch 8L to move the highlighted display to the left. The second light level can be lowered.

The second volume level and the second volume level can be switched by operating the stop switch 8C.

Further, on the setting screen, in the character effect area 52c, a screen for a battle effect of an ally character and an enemy character, which is a part of the effect screen actually used during the game, is displayed. In this embodiment, the player can set the volume and the light amount by using this battle effect as a sample. Specifically, if the player raises the second volume level, the volume of the ally character's voice (in the example of FIG. 14, the voice of “Did you come?!”) rises, and the player can lower the second volume level. For example, the sound volume of the teammate character is reduced. Further, if the player raises the second light amount stage, the light amount on the screen for the battle effect increases and becomes brighter, and if the player lowers the second light amount stage, the light amount on the screen for the battle effect decreases and becomes darker.

In this way, since the volume and the light amount during the production can be set by taking the actual production during the game as an example, the player can easily perform the setting.

[Relationship between the state of the switch on the store side and the volume and amount of light]
The relationship between the state of the store-side setting switch 60 (that is, the set channel) and the volume and light amount will be described with reference to FIG.

The channels of the store-side setting switch 60 are divided into 16 stages of "0" to "F". That is, the level of the volume and the light amount set by the clerk (corresponding to the first volume level and the first light level) is divided into 16 levels. Furthermore, a number that is first highlighted (also referred to as an initial display) when the setting screen is displayed is associated with the channel of the store-side setting switch 60.

For example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is switched to "0", the initial display of the volume is "2" and the initial display of the light amount is "30%". When the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is switched to "9", the initial display of the volume is "14" and the initial display of the light amount is "100%". The player can recognize the current volume and the amount of light by checking the initial display screen (highlighted numbers).

When the channel of the store setting switch 60 is set within the range of "A" to "F", the setting of the second volume level and the second light level is prohibited, and the setting screen is not displayed. Therefore, when the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "A" to "F", the initial display is not associated.

An actual volume range is associated with the channel of the store setting switch 60. It should be noted that the numbers in parentheses in the column of the actual volume range in FIG. 14 are volume displays corresponding to the second volume level set by the player. That is, it corresponds to the numbers in the volume setting area 52a of FIG. The larger the value of the actual volume range, the larger the volume.

For example, when the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "0" to "4", the actual volume is set within the range of "2" to "14", and the volume at that time is further set. The display is "2" to "14". When the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "5" to "9", the actual volume is set within the range of "10" to "22", and the volume display at that time is It becomes "2"-"14". Therefore, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "0" to "4", the second volume level is set to "2", "3", "4" by the player's operation. .. As the volume increases by "14", the actual volume also increases by "2", "3", "4"... "14". Further, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "5" to "9", the second volume level is set to "2", "3", "4" by the player's operation. .. As the volume increases by "14", the actual volume also increases by "10", "11", "12"... "22".

When the channel of the store setting switch 60 is set within the range of "A" to "F", the actual volume becomes a fixed value. For example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set to "A", the actual volume is fixed to "2", and when it is set to "B", the actual volume is fixed to "4". When set to "C," the actual volume is fixed at "7," when set to "D," the actual volume is fixed at "10," and when set to "E," the actual volume is set. Is fixed to "15", and when set to "F", the actual volume is fixed to "22".

The actual light amount range is associated with the channel of the store-side setting switch 60. The actual light amount range matches the light amount display range corresponding to the second light amount stage set by the player. That is, it corresponds to the number in the light amount setting area 52b in FIG. The larger the value of the actual light amount range, the larger the light amount.

For example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "0" to "3", the actual light amount is set to "30%", "65%", or "100%". The light amount display at that time is “30%”, “65%”, and “100%”. When the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "4" to "9", the actual light amount is set to any of "50%", "75%", and "100%", The light amount display at that time is "50%", "75%", and "100%". Therefore, when the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "0" to "3", the second light level is "30%", "65%", and "by the player's operation. When it is set to any of "100%", the actual light amount is also set to any of "30%", "65%", and "100%" accordingly. Further, when the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is set within the range of “4” to “9”, the second light level is set to “50%”, “75%”, and When it is set to any of "100%", the actual light amount is also set to any of "50%", "75%", and "100%" accordingly.

When the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "A" to "F", the actual light amount becomes a fixed value. For example, when the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is set to "A" or "B", the actual volume is fixed to "30%", and when it is set to "C" or "D", the actual volume is fixed. The volume is fixed to "75%", and when set to "E" or "F", the actual volume is fixed to "100%".

[Player side effect setting process]
The player side effect setting process executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. The player side effect setting process is a process executed when the player changes the setting of the effect mode during the game. By executing the player-side effect setting process, the player can set the volume level of the effect (second volume step) and the light level level of the effect (second light level). ..

The sub-control unit 91 determines whether the player-side setting switch 70 has been operated (S150). When determining that the player-side setting switch 70 has not been operated (N in S150), the sub-control unit 91 ends the player-side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when determining that the player-side setting switch 70 has been operated (Y in S150), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the door opening detection switch 25 is in the ON state (S151). When determining that the door open detection switch 25 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1b is open (N in S151), the sub control unit 91 ends the player side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 determines that the door opening detection switch 25 is in the ON state, that is, the front door 1b is closed (Y in S151), the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is "A". ~ It is judged whether it is in the range of "F" (S152). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is within the range of “A” to “F” (Y in S152), the second volume level and the second light level level of the player are set. In order to limit (prohibit) the setting, the player side effect setting process is ended. In this case, the volume and the light amount are set based on the channel setting of the player-side setting switch 70 (that is, the first volume level and the first light level stage).

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 determines that the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is not within the range of “A” to “F” (N in S152), the setting screen illustrated in FIG. 13 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. 51 and the initial display according to the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 (S153).

For example, FIG. 13 shows an example of a setting screen when the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is within the range of “4” to “9”. In this case, in the volume setting area 52a, the volume display of "2" to "14" is performed, and in the light amount setting area 52b, the light amount display of "50%", "75%", and "100%" is performed. Is done. Further, in the volume setting area 52a, initial display with "10" highlighted is performed, and in the light amount setting area 52b, initial display with "75%" highlighted.

In the present embodiment, the setting screen is displayed by operating the player-side setting switch 70 when the front door 1b is closed, but after that, it continues even after the front door 1b is opened. Then the setting screen is displayed. Therefore, after the front door 1b is closed again, the setting screen before opening is continuously displayed. That is, once the setting screen is displayed, the setting screen continues to be displayed even if the front door 1b is opened.

After displaying the setting screen, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the volume or the light amount is changed based on the change operation by the player using the stop switch (S154). When the sub control unit 91 determines that the volume or the light amount has not been changed within the predetermined period (N in S154), the sub control unit 91 proceeds to the process of S159.

On the other hand, when determining that the volume or the light amount has been changed (Y in S154), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is within the range of “A” to “F”. Yes (S155). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 is within the range of “A” to “F” (Y in S155), the second volume level and the second light level level of the player are set. In order to limit (prohibit) the setting, the process proceeds to S159.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 determines that the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 is not within the range of “A” to “F” (N in S155), whether the changed target is the volume is determined. The determination is made (S156). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the changed target is not the volume but the light amount (N in S156), the magnitude of the light amount in the effect is set to the reference setting based on the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 and the player. The light amount is set according to the light amount setting selected by (S158). In the light amount setting area 52b of FIG. 13, the highlighted display moves based on the selected light amount, and in the character effect area 52c, the light amount of the screen for the battle effect changes based on the selected light amount. Then, the sub control unit 91 proceeds to the process of S159.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 determines that the changed target is the volume (Y in S156), the sub control unit 91 executes the volume changing operation process (S157), and then shifts to the process of S159.

The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an ending operation has been performed in the process of S159). This ending operation is performed by long-pressing the player-side setting switch 70.

When determining that the ending operation has not been performed within the predetermined period (N in S159), the sub control unit 91 returns to the process of S154. On the other hand, when determining that the ending operation has been performed (Y in S159), the sub control unit 91 ends the display of the setting screen (S160) and ends the player side effect setting process. When the player side effect setting process is finished, the volume set based on the first volume level and the second volume level, and the light amount set based on the first light level and the second light level are reflected in the performance. It

[Volume change operation processing]
The sound volume changing operation process executed by the sub control unit 91 in S157 of FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG.

The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the confirmation sound outputting timer is counting (S170). In the present embodiment, when the volume is changed by the player's change operation, the highlighted display moves in volume setting area 52a of FIG. 13 based on the selected volume. Further, a confirmation sound is output using the battle effect performed in the volume setting area 52a. For example, as shown in the example of FIG. 13, the voice of “Did you come?” is output as a confirmation sound. By outputting the confirmation sound, the player can confirm the changed volume. The confirmation sound outputting timer counts according to the output time of the confirmation sound, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value, the timer is up and the counting is stopped.

When it is determined that the timer for outputting confirmation sound is not counting (N in S170), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the player has performed a change operation to the maximum changeable volume in the second volume stage ( S171). When it is determined that the volume control operation has been changed to the maximum volume (Y in S171), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the volume has already been changed to the maximum volume (S172).

When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the volume has not been changed to the maximum volume yet (N in S172), the player selects the volume level of the effect based on the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60. The volume is set according to the set volume (S177). After that, the sub control unit 91 outputs the confirmation sound of the volume set in the processing of S177 from the speakers 53 and 54 (S178), and shifts to the processing of S179.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume has already been changed to the maximum volume (Y in S172), the sub-control unit 91 sets the reference setting based on the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 and the maximum volume setting currently selected. confirmation sound volume corresponding, i.e. the maximum volume of the confirmation sound corresponding to the channel setting shop side setting switch 60 is output from the speaker 53, 54 (S17 3), the process proceeds to S179.

When the sub-control unit 91 determines in the processing of S171 that the volume has not been changed to the maximum volume (N in S171), whether or not the player has changed the volume to the minimum volume that can be changed in the second volume stage. determines whether or not (S17 4). When determining that the volume has been changed to the minimum volume (Y in S174), the sub control unit 91 determines whether the volume has already been changed to the minimum volume (S175).

When the sub control unit 91 determines that the volume has already been changed to the minimum volume (Y in S175), the sub control unit 91 responds to the standard setting based on the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 and the currently selected minimum volume setting. The confirmation sound of the volume, that is, the confirmation sound of the minimum volume corresponding to the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is output from the speakers 53 and 54 (S176), and the process proceeds to S179.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 determines that the volume has not been changed to the minimum volume (N in S174) or has not been changed to the minimum volume (N in S175), the process of S177 is performed. Move to.

In the process of S179, the sub control unit 91 starts counting of the confirmation sound outputting timer (S179), and ends the volume changing operation process.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 determines in the processing of S170 that the confirmation sound outputting timer is counting (Y in S170), the sub control unit 91 decrements the count of the confirmation sound outputting timer by 1 (S180). After that, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the timer is up due to the count value of the confirmation sound outputting timer reaching a predetermined value (S181). When it is determined that the timer has not expired (N in S181), the sub control unit 91 ends the volume changing operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer is up (Y in S181), the sub control unit 91 ends the output of the confirmation sound (S182) and ends the volume change operation process.

Thus, the player operates the player-side setting switch 70 to set the volume and the amount of light in the effect during the game. That is, on condition that the power of the slot machine 1 is ON, the front door 1b is closed, and the player-side setting switch 70 is operated, the setting screen is displayed and the volume and the light amount can be set. Is.

Here, when the front door 1b is opened, the outside of the front door 1b may approach an adjacent slot machine. In such a case, a person other than the player, for example, a player sitting next to the player may touch the player-side setting switch 70 to operate it. In addition, while the front door 1b is being opened and the clogging of medals is being cleared or the payout rate setting value is being changed, the clerk may touch the player-side setting switch 70 without noticing it. There is a fear.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the player-side setting switch 70 is operated by a person other than the player playing in the slot machine 1, setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front door 1b is open. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the volume and the light amount from being set with a content that the player does not intend.

Further, even if the front door 1b is once opened while the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is closed, the setting screen continues to be displayed. For this reason, even if the front door 1b is once opened by the player for clearing a medal clogging during setting, when the front door 1b is closed again thereafter, the volume and the light amount are continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the convenience of the player is improved and no dissatisfaction is felt.

In the present embodiment, the initial display of the volume and the amount of light, that is, the volume and the amount of light that are first highlighted when the setting screen is displayed is the channel setting state of the store side setting switch 60 (first volume level, It depends on the first light amount stage). For example, as shown in FIG. 14, when the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is changed from "1" to "3", the initial display of the volume is also changed from "3" to "6", and the initial display of the light amount is performed. Also changes from "30%" to "60%". If the initial display of the volume and the light amount is constant regardless of the channel setting state of the store-side setting switch 60, the player may mistakenly recognize the actual volume and the light amount. For example, regardless of whether the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is "1" or "3", if the initial display of the volume is always "2", the player mistakenly recognizes the actual volume.

However, since the initial display of the volume and the light amount changes according to the channel setting state of the store side setting switch 60 (first volume stage, first light amount stage), the player sets the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60. It is easy to understand the state of and does not mistake the actual volume. Thereby, the player can suitably set the volume and the light amount.

Furthermore, since the initial display of the volume and the light amount is different between when the first volume level and the first light level are the highest level and when the first level is the lowest level, the actual volume and the light level are less likely to be mistaken, and the player is The volume and the amount of light can be set appropriately.

When the initial display of the volume and the light amount is other than the first volume level and the first light level, the second volume level (“2” to “13”) and the second light level (“30” other than the highest level are displayed. %", "65%", "50%", "75%"), and the second volume level ("14") which is the highest level when the first volume level or the first light intensity level is the maximum level. And the second light amount stage (“100%”). Therefore, the actual volume and the amount of light are not easily misrecognized, and the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light appropriately. Furthermore, the volume and the amount of light do not become higher than the settings at the game shop side. Therefore, by setting the first volume level and the first light level to the highest level, the gaming shop side can prevent the output of an unintended loud sound and the lighting with bright light.

When the channel setting of the store setting switch 60 is changed, the first volume level and the first light intensity level are set (changed) for the first time when the setting screen is displayed, and the actual volume and light intensity are reflected. That is, even if the store clerk changes the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60, at that time, it is not reflected in the volume and the light amount, and then the player operates the player side setting switch 70 to display the setting screen, The volume and the light amount are reflected only when the display of the setting screen ends. For example, normally, the player cannot set the first volume level or the first light intensity level, and therefore even if the first volume level or the first light intensity level is changed, the player can set the volume or the light level before the change. Although it may be desired, even in such a case, the player can recognize the change in the volume and the light amount by the display of the setting screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the volume and the light amount from being changed at a timing not intended by the player.

At the time of setting the second volume level, the confirmation sound using the sound of the battle effect is output, so that the volume setting can be confirmed while listening to the actual effect sound, and the player can easily set the volume. be able to. Further, when setting the second light amount stage, since the light amount of the battle effect screen is changed, it is possible to confirm the light amount setting while looking at the actual effect screen, and the player can easily set the light amount. it can.

As the channels of the store-side setting switch 60, "A" to "F" for limiting the adjustment of the volume and the light amount by the player are prepared, so that the volume setting and the light amount setting on the player side can be limited, and the game store can It is possible to prevent setting with an unintended volume and light amount.

In the volume changing operation process, it is possible to invalidate the volume changing operation while the confirmation sound is being output by first determining whether or not the confirmation sound outputting timer is counting. Therefore, even if the player continuously performs a change operation in a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an unintended volume adjustment.

Further, even if the current volume is the minimum volume, if the player further reduces the volume, the confirmation sound of the minimum volume is output. If the player tries to raise the volume even though the volume is currently the maximum, a confirmation sound of the maximum volume is output. For this reason, it is possible to let the player recognize that the operation is performed beyond the range where the volume can be set, and it is possible to call attention.

[Modification]
Although the main embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modified examples of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

[Settings on the store side]
In the present embodiment, the store clerk can set the payout rate, the effect sound volume, the effect light amount, and the power saving mode as the settings related to the game. However, the clerk sets the main side (a configuration included in the game control board 40 such as the main control section 41 and a configuration connected to the game control board 40), and the sub side (the production control board 90 such as the sub control section 91). The configuration included in the above, the configuration connected to the effect control board 90, and the like), and other settings may be possible.

For example, the store clerk may be able to set the pressure (pressing) and hardness when operating various operating means such as the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R as the setting on the main side, It is also possible to be able to set lighting and extinguishing control of various lighting means such as the input request LED 17 and the start valid LED and the lighting condition thereof.

For example, the store clerk may be able to set the pressure and hardness when operating various operation means such as the effect switch 56 as the setting on the sub side. As long as the slot machine has an RTC( ), which measures the time, the clerk may be able to set the time on the RTC as a sub-side setting. If the slot machine is capable of controlling in a plurality of types of production modes (for example, a production mode in which the character A is the protagonist and a production mode in which the character B is the protagonist), the clerk can set the production mode as the sub-side setting. May be As a sub-side setting, the store clerk may be able to set an error notification mode and an execution frequency that are executed when a medal is jammed, a cheating act is performed, or the stop switch is not operated in a recommended procedure. Further, the clerk may be able to set the deletion of the game history (for example, the number of games, the number of bonus winnings, the number of payouts, etc.) and the presence/absence of display as the sub setting.

Further, it may be provided with a unit for switching between the setting on the main side and the setting on the sub side as described above. For example, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a shop-side setting screen in the modification. Switching between the main setting and the sub setting will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power of the slot machine 1 is ON, the front door 1b is opened, and the calling operation for displaying the setting screen on the store side is performed by the store clerk, the setting screen shown in FIG. 17A is displayed. The hall menu screen is displayed. On the hole menu screen, it is possible to select either a mode for making settings on the main side or a mode for making settings on the sub side.

When the main side setting mode is selected, as shown in FIG. 17B, a screen in which one of the payout rate setting and the switch pressing setting, which is an example of the main side setting, can be selected is displayed. Is displayed. When the payout rate setting is selected, as shown in FIG. 17C, a screen in which any of the setting values 1 to 6 can be selected is displayed.

On the other hand, when the sub-side setting mode is selected, as shown in FIG. 17D, any one of the setting of the volume, the setting of the light amount, and the setting of the power saving mode, which is an example of the setting of the sub-side, is performed. Selectable screen is displayed. When the volume setting is selected, as shown in FIG. 17(e), a screen capable of selecting any one of stages 0 to F is displayed.

In this way, the store clerk can selectively switch between the main-side setting and the sub-side setting, so that the game-related setting can be easily performed. Further, a setting screen (for example, a hall menu screen) for switching between the main side setting and the sub side setting is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 based on one operation (for example, a calling operation). , It is possible to make settings relating to the game more easily and easily.

[About the settings on the player side]
In the present embodiment, the player can set the volume of the effect and the light amount of the effect as settings related to the game. However, the player sets the main side (the configuration included in the game control board 40 such as the main control section 41 and the configuration connected to the game control board 40) and the sub side (the production control board such as the sub control section 91). The configuration included in 90, the configuration connected to the production control board 90, and the like) may be set, and other settings may be made.

For example, the player may be able to set the pressure (pressing) and hardness when operating various operating means such as the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R as the main side setting. It is also possible to be able to set lighting and extinguishing control of various lighting means such as the input request LED 17 and the start valid LED and the lighting condition thereof.

For example, the player may be able to set the pressure and hardness when operating various operation means such as the effect switch 56 as the sub-side setting. The player may be able to set the effect mode as the sub-side setting, or may be able to set the characters, music, etc. that appear in the set effect mode. The player may be able to set the power saving mode as the sub-side setting. The player may be able to set deletion of the game history (for example, the number of games, the number of bonus winnings, the number of payouts, etc.) and the presence/absence of display as the sub-side setting. As a sub-setting, the player can display a password for managing a game history by communicating with an external server via a mobile terminal or the like via the Internet, or even enter the password. Good.

[About setting operations on the store side]
In the present embodiment, in order for the store clerk to set the payout rate, it was necessary to operate the setting key switch 37 provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100 inside the housing 1a. Further, in order to set the standard of the volume and the light amount, it was a condition to operate the store side setting switch 60 provided inside the front door 1b. Therefore, only a store clerk who can open the front door 1b can set the payout rate by operating the setting key switch 37, and similarly, only a store clerk who can open the front door 1b can store. By operating the setting switch 60, it was possible to set the standard of volume and light amount.

However, the operating means operated by the store clerk at the time of setting may be provided inside the housing 1a or inside the front door 1b, or outside the housing 1a or outside the front door 1b. May be. For example, a locked operation means that can be unlocked only by a clerk may be provided outside the front door 1b.

In the present embodiment, if the operating means is provided outside the housing 1a or outside the front door 1b, even if a person other than the store clerk can operate the operating means, as long as the front door 1b is not opened. Cannot set the payout rate or set the standard of quantity and light quantity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the settings related to the game from being illegally made. From the viewpoint that only the store clerk can open the front door 1b, it is preferable that the operation means that can be operated only by the store clerk is provided inside the housing 1a or inside the front door 1b.

Further, the operation means that can be operated only by the store clerk at the time of setting may use the operation means operated by the player during a game or the like, similarly to the setting of the power saving mode. For example, the game switches may be set by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in a special order known only to the store clerk.

The operation means for setting the power saving mode may be provided inside the housing 1a or inside the front door 1b.

The operating means for setting the payout rate, the operating means for setting the reference level of the volume and the light amount, and the operating means for setting the power saving mode are different means as in the present embodiment. Alternatively, all or part of these may be common means.

[About the setting operation on the player side]
In the present embodiment, in order for the player to set the volume and the amount of light, it is a condition that the player-side setting switch 70 provided outside the front door 1b is operated.

However, the operating means that can be operated by the player at the time of setting is not limited to the outside of the front door 1b, and may be provided outside the housing 1a that is difficult to operate, such as the side surface or the top surface of the housing 1a. .. In this way, even when the front door 1b is opened, there is no risk that a player or a store clerk sitting next to the player will touch the operation means to operate it.

The operation means operable by the player may be provided inside the housing 1a or inside the front door 1b. In this case, it suffices that the player can operate by exposing the operation means to the outside, such as a hole formed in the front door 1b.

Further, the operation means operable by the player may utilize the operation means operated by the player during a game or the like. For example, the volume and the light amount may be set by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in a special order.

The operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operation rod). It may be a provided stick controller. The player can select an item by moving the icon displayed on the screen by tilting the operation stick, and can determine the selected item by pressing the trigger button. Good. Alternatively, the operation means operable by the player may be a jog dial, a cross key, or the like.

[About means to prohibit shop settings]
In the present embodiment, even when the operating means is operated, the setting relating to the game is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. For example, even if the setting key switch 37 is operated, setting of the payout rate is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. Even if the store side setting switch 60 is operated, the reference setting of the volume and the light amount is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. Even if all the stop switches are pressed for a long time, the setting related to the game is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed.

However, it is not limited to such a method, and the setting relating to the game may be prohibited by another method. For example, when the front door 1b is closed, the operation means itself may not be operable. For example, when the front door 1b is closed, even if the operation means can be operated, the input signal by the operation may not be effectively accepted by the main control unit 41 or the sub control unit 91. For example, when the front door 1b is closed, even if an input signal based on the operation of the operating means is effectively accepted by the main control unit 41 or the sub control unit 91, the processing based on the input signal is not executed. It may be.

Furthermore, if the setting screen is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. 17, if the settings related to the game are possible, the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is closed. It may not be done. Alternatively, when the front door 1b is closed, even if the setting screen is displayed, the setting related to the game may not be possible.

[About means for prohibiting settings on the player side]
In the present embodiment, even when the operating means is operated, the setting relating to the game is prohibited when the front door 1b is open. For example, even if the player-side setting switch 70 is operated, setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front door 1b is open.

However, it is not limited to such a method, and the setting relating to the game may be prohibited by another method. For example, when the front door 1b is open, the operation means itself may not be operable. For example, when the front door 1b is open, even if the operation means can be operated, the input signal by the operation may not be effectively accepted by the main control unit 41 or the sub control unit 91. For example, when the front door 1b is open, even if an input signal based on the operation of the operating means is effectively accepted by the main control unit 41 or the sub control unit 91, the processing based on the input signal is not executed. It may be.

Further, by displaying the setting screen on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. 17, if the setting related to the game is possible, the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is open. It may not be done. Alternatively, when the front door 1b is open, even if the setting screen is displayed, the setting regarding the game may not be possible.

[About volume and light level settings]
In the present embodiment, the store staff can operate the store-side setting switch 60 to set the reference level of the volume and the light amount (setting of the first volume level and the first light level). Further, the player can set the volume and the light amount (the setting of the second volume level and the second light level) by operating the player side setting switch 70. Further, regarding the setting of the volume, if the player tries to set the volume further beyond the limit value of the volume even though the volume is currently the maximum or minimum, the volume of the limit value (the maximum volume, The confirmation sound of the minimum volume) was output. However, the setting of the volume and the light amount is not limited to the example of the present embodiment, and other examples may be used.

For example, one of the first volume level setting by the store clerk and the second volume level setting by the player may not be set. It may not be possible to set any of the first light intensity level setting by the store clerk and the second light intensity level setting by the player.

The confirmation sound is not limited to be output when the volume is set, and the lighting means such as the effect LED 52 may be turned on for confirmation. The confirmation sound and the confirmation lighting may be performed at the same time. The confirmation lighting may be performed instead of the confirmation sound only when the player attempts to set the volume further beyond the limit value of the volume even though the volume is currently the maximum or minimum. The confirmation lighting may be performed in addition to the confirmation sound only when the player tries to set the volume further beyond the limit value, even though the volume is currently the maximum or minimum. The tone color of the confirmation sound may change only when the player tries to set the sound volume beyond the limit value, even though the sound volume is currently the maximum or minimum. The confirmation lighting may change to blinking only when the player tries to set the sound volume further beyond the limit value of the sound volume even though the sound volume is currently the maximum or minimum. The confirmation sound may not be output when the player tries to set the sound volume beyond the limit value, even though the sound volume is currently the maximum or minimum.

When the operation interval between one operation and another operation is shorter than the time to output the confirmation sound corresponding to the one operation, the volume is changed to the other operation and the other operation is performed. The confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume set by may be not output. Further, when the confirmation sound is not output a plurality of times, the confirmation sound corresponding to one operation may be output, and then the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume set by the latest operation may be output.

Not only for setting the volume but also for setting the amount of light, even if the present amount of light is the maximum or the minimum as in this embodiment and the modification, the player further exceeds the limit of the amount of light. Alternatively, special control (for example, control such that the confirmation lighting amount becomes maximum or minimum) may be performed.

The display showing the second volume level and the second light intensity level is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, the second volume level may be displayed as a bar with a number of squares corresponding to the second volume level. In this case, when the operation means such as the volume adjustment button is first operated in the demonstration, a bar is first displayed as an initial display, and the subsequent operation of the volume adjustment button (in FIG. 18, the volume, that is, the second volume stage The number of squares may be increased or decreased (decreased by one in FIG. 18) in accordance with (lowering operation).

For example, as shown in FIG. 19, the second volume level is displayed as a bar with a number of squares corresponding to the second volume level, and when the operation means such as the volume adjustment button is operated at the beginning of the demonstration, the volume adjustment button is operated. The bar in which the number of squares is increased or decreased according to the operation (in FIG. 19, the operation of lowering the volume, that is, the second volume step) may be displayed first. In this case, the virtual bar before increasing or decreasing may be the initial display. Thus, the initial display may indicate a volume level according to the first volume level after the first operation is performed and before the second operation is performed, and is not actually displayed. May be

For example, the second volume level is not limited to one level that changes each time the first volume level changes by one level, and may change one level when the first volume level changes by a plurality of levels. Good. That is, the first volume level and the second volume level do not have to change one to one.

In the present embodiment, "A" to "F" are provided to limit the adjustment of the volume and the light amount by the player, so that the volume setting and the light amount setting on the player side can be limited, but on the player side. It may be one that limits only the volume setting, or one that limits only the light amount setting on the player side.

Although the volume and the amount of light to be highlighted are changed by the change operation by the stop switch and the setting content is reflected in the effect when the end operation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting content may be reflected in the effect each time the volume or the amount of light to be highlighted is changed by the change operation. The first volume level and the first light intensity level are not limited to those reflected when the setting screen is displayed, but are not reflected when the setting screen starts to be displayed, and are changed when the player makes a change operation. The setting of the first volume level and the first light intensity level may be performed. Alternatively, the first volume level and the first light intensity level are set before the setting screen is displayed (for example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set), and the first volume level or the first volume level is set when the player makes a change operation. The volume may be changed or the amount of light may be changed based on one light amount stage.

In the volume changing operation process of FIG. 16, the volume changing operation is invalidated while the confirmation sound is being output by first determining whether or not the confirmation sound outputting timer is counting. Not exclusively. For example, when the confirmation sound is being output, the volume change operation is enabled, and when a new volume is set, the confirmation sound is output after the previous confirmation sound ends. May be. As a result, when the player continuously performs a change operation in a short period of time, the confirmation sound is continuously output, and there is no risk that the player will misrecognize the confirmation sound. This makes it easier to understand which volume the volume is. Further, when the volume is newly set while the previous confirmation sound is being output, the confirmation sound based on this new setting may not be output.

[About the setting screen]
In the present embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened while the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is closed, the setting screen is continuously displayed. Not exclusively. For example, when the front door 1b is closed when the front door 1b is closed and the front door 1b is opened, the setting screen display is temporarily stopped, and then the front door 1b is opened again and the setting screen before opening is displayed. May be displayed again. Even in this way, even if the front door 1b is once opened during the setting, the setting can be performed from the continuation before the opening, and the convenience of the player is improved and the player does not feel dissatisfied.

A period during which the setting screen can be displayed may be set. For example, regardless of whether or not the front door 1b is closed, the display of the setting screen may be stopped when 10 minutes have elapsed since the setting screen was displayed. Furthermore, only when the front door 1b is open, the period during which the setting screen can be displayed may be set. For example, the setting screen may continue to be displayed even if 10 minutes have passed while the front door 1b was closed, but the setting screen may not be displayed if 10 minutes have passed while the front door 1b was opened.

After the period in which the setting screen can be displayed has passed and the setting screen is not displayed, the screen may be switched to a predetermined screen other than the setting screen such as the demo screen.

The display of the setting screen may be terminated based on the player's termination operation, or may be terminated after a lapse of time. Further, the display of the setting screen may be ended by both the ending operation of the player and the passage of time.

[Allowable timing of injection and settlement after replay winning]
Even if the timing at which the insertion (credit) is allowed after the replay winning is made when the automatic BET by the replay winning is started, the timing at which the settlement is allowed after the replay winning is set by the automatic bet by the replay winning. It may be completed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d), the timing at which insertion (credit) and settlement after the replay winning is permitted is at the time of starting or completing the automatic BET by the replay winning. However, the timing is not limited to this, and may be the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the start or the completion of the automatic BET by the replay winning. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time elapses or when a predetermined process ends. As an example in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the predetermined time elapses after the completion of the automatic BET by the replay winning, for example, the BET command (with the BET sound) set in S14 of FIG. When the average time required to complete the output of the third BET sound based on the command is time A, it is satisfied when the predetermined condition is determined to be Y in S17 and time A has elapsed. If the average time required until the BET command (without BET sound) set in S15 of FIG. 7 is output to the sub control unit 91 and received is time B, the predetermined condition is satisfied. May be established when the time B has elapsed since the determination in S17 was Y. After it is determined as Y in S17, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the process may be allowed to proceed to S20.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the first replay, the second replay, and the third replay are provided as the types of replay combinations has been described, but the type of replay combinations is not limited to this. As for, any one of the re-game combinations may be provided.

In the present embodiment, an example is described in which throwing in after a replay winning is permitted regardless of the type of replay winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and throwing in after a replay winning depending on the type of replay winning is possible. It may be configured to be allowed. For example, the insertion may not be allowed after the first replay winning, but the insertion may be allowed only after the second or third replay winning. That is, the insertion may be allowed only when it is difficult to notice that the re-play display result has been derived, and the convenience may be improved without causing the player to bother.

In the present embodiment, an example in which settlement after replay winning is allowed regardless of the type of replay winning combination has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and settlement after replay winning depending on the type of replay winning is possible. It may be configured to be allowed. For example, the settlement may not be allowed after the first replay winning, whereas the settlement may be allowed only after the second or third replay winning. That is, the settlement may be allowed only when it is hard to notice that the re-play display result has been derived, and the convenience may be improved without causing the player to bother.

[About replay symbol combination]
In the present embodiment, the first replay symbol combination is described as an example composed of only the same symbol (“replay”), but is not limited to this, and one symbol and the one symbol You may comprise so that it may consist of a pattern with a similar external shape. A design having a similar outer shape means a design having a common aesthetic appearance (impression) caused by a player who is a consumer because the outer shapes are common, and as a result, the same design is conceptually the same. A pattern that can be recognized (it is difficult to recognize that it is a different pattern). For example, when one symbol is a pattern in which the letters “REPLAY” are surrounded by an ellipse, the letters “REPLAY” are underlined and the symbols in the shape surrounded by an ellipse are one. It can be said that the shape is similar to the design.

In the present embodiment, the symbol combination of the third replay is the same symbol (“replay”) as the symbol of the first replay, and a different symbol whose outer shape is not the same as or similar to the symbol (“black 7 )) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a symbol similar to the symbol of the first replay, and is not the same as or similar to the symbol of the first replay. It may be composed of only the design. In this case, the different symbol may be a symbol (for example, a symbol with a star mark) that is not included in any of the winning symbol combinations other than the replay, and is included in the winning symbol combination other than the replay. The pattern (for example, "black 7") may be displayed.

In the present embodiment, two types are shown as the watermelon symbol combination, but only one of the “watermelon-watermelon-BAR” is the watermelon symbol combination, and the other “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the third. It may be a combination of replay symbols. Thereby, the symbol combination of the third replay is composed only of different symbols that are not the same as or similar to the symbol of the first replay, and the different symbol is included in the symbol combination of the watermelon winning prize other than the replay. Become. As a result, when the third replay wins, the player is given the impression that a watermelon has won, and the bet count needs to be set to start the next game. Can be held by the player.

Symbol combinations related to replay (for example, "Replay-Replay-Replay", "Black 7-Replay-Replay", "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon", etc.) are all replay winning by being stopped on the winning line. However, not limited to this, for example, a predetermined symbol combination different from the above symbol combination is defined as a symbol combination for generating a replay prize, and when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on the pay line. In addition, the symbol combination may be configured to be stopped on an invalid line different from the winning line. Specifically, of the winning lines L1 to L5, only the winning line is L1, and the winning lines L2 to L5 are invalid lines that do not cause the winning even if the predetermined symbol combination causing the winning is stopped. The predetermined symbol combination that causes replay may be stopped on the pay line L1 so that the symbol combination is stopped on any of the invalid lines L2 to L5. Even in this case, the replay winning is caused by the predetermined symbol combination being stopped on the pay line, but it may appear as if the above symbol combination is being stopped on the ineffective line. it can.

Further, in the case of structuring in this way, the two types shown as the watermelon symbol combination are the symbol combinations that generate the watermelon winnings as they are, and the symbol combination of the third replay is the “watermelon-watermelon” among the watermelon symbol combinations. -Watermelon" may be a symbol combination that stops on the winning line when it stops on the ineffective line. This makes it possible to make you think that you have won a watermelon when "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" is stopped on a straight line, and the impression that you need to set the number of bets to start the next game. Can be held by the player.

[Freeze after winning the replay]
Control (so-called freeze) may be performed to delay the progress of the game until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied after the replay winning. For example, if NO is determined in S18 of FIG. 7 and credit is possible, the process may not be moved to S20 until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied. The predetermined cancellation condition may be satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or may be satisfied when a predetermined operation is detected.

A flow path switching solenoid 30 is provided in the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and freeze release for detecting medals from the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the medal insertion section 4 side (upstream side) It is also possible to provide the use sensor A and establish a predetermined release condition when the freeze release sensor A detects a medal during freezing. Since the flow path switching solenoid is turned off as shown in S48 of FIG. 8 when the game is started, the state is maintained at the end of the game including the replay prize until the process of S20 after the end of the game is performed. Even if a medal is inserted, the medal is ejected from the medal payout opening 9.

However, when a medal is thrown in during the freeze generated after the replay winning, the freeze is canceled by detecting the medal by the freeze canceling sensor A, the process of S20 is performed, and the flow path is determined by S22. The switching solenoid is turned on, the medal is detected by the inserted medal sensor 31 arranged on the downstream side of the flow path switching solenoid, and credits are added in S40 without being ejected from the medal payout opening 9. As a result, even after the replay winning (when the credit counter has not reached 50), the next game cannot be started without inserting a medal as in the case of winning the small win or losing. be able to. In the case of configuring in this way, further, as shown in the [Regarding the symbol combination of replay] column, when the "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" which is thought to be a watermelon winning is stopped on the winning line or the ineffective line, the third If the replay prize is configured to occur, it is possible to make the player think that the watermelon has been won from the symbol combination at the end of the game, and it is necessary to set the bet number in order to start the next game. It is possible to give the player the impression that there is. Although the freeze is released by the inserted medal, the medal that triggers the release of the freeze is added to the medal without being discharged from the medal payout opening 9. Therefore, it is convenient without making the player feel bothered. It is possible to improve the sex.

As described in the [Regarding the Allowed Timing of Payment/Payment After Replay Prize] column, the automatic BET by the replay prize is started (or started at the timing when the injection (credit)/payment is allowed after the replay prize) ), the control for delaying the progress of the game until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied (so-called freeze) may be performed as in the above example. In the first example, for example, at the timing when the bet number setting starts (after it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 50), in the second example, for example, when the interrupt processing interrupt is permitted. Then, the freeze may be generated in each case, and thereby, the same effect as that of the above-described example is obtained.

In addition, when the freeze is generated after the replay winning, the process of lighting the 1BETLED 14, the 2BETLED 15, and the 3BETLED 16 by the replay winning in order after the freeze is released, the replaying LED 20, and the start valid LED 18 (while waiting) Performs the process of lighting the LED 19) during the wait. In the above example, an example in which the freeze release condition is satisfied when the freeze release sensor A detects a medal is described. However, the freeze release condition is not limited to this, and in addition to this, the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch are also provided. It may be configured such that it is also established by the operation to 6.

[About payment processing]
In the present embodiment, regarding the settlement processing, when the settlement switch 10 is operated while the bet number is set by inserting a medal or operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, FIG. An example in which NO is determined in S56, the bet amount settlement process is performed in S57, and then the settlement switch 10 is operated again, Y is determined in S56 and the credit settlement process is performed in S59, that is, the first settlement operation. The example in which the bet number is settled in, and the credit is settled in the next settlement operation has been described. However, the settlement process is not limited to such a pattern, and may be performed in the following pattern.

Pattern a: Credit settlement may be performed in the first settlement operation, and bet number settlement may be performed in the next settlement operation. For example, in S56, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0, and when it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S59, credit settlement is performed, and the value of the credit counter is 0. When it is determined, the process may proceed to S57 and the bet amount may be settled.

Pattern b: The number of bets may be settled by adding credits for the number of bets in the first settlement operation, and the credit settlement may be made in the next settlement operation. For example, when the set number of bets is 3 and the credit is 40, the bet number is settled by adding 3 credits to the bet number in the first settlement operation and setting the credit to 43, and the next settlement operation. The credit settlement may be performed by paying out 43 medals. In this case, the value of the credit counter may exceed 50 due to the bet number adjustment performed by the first adjustment operation. In this case, the value of the credit counter may be set to a value exceeding 50, or the amount of medals exceeding 50 may be paid out at the time of bet number adjustment.

Pattern c: The bet number may be settled first, and subsequently the credit settlement may be made in one settling operation. For example, when NO is determined in S56, bet amount adjustment may be performed, and subsequently credit adjustment may be performed, and when Y is determined in S56, credit adjustment may be performed.

Pattern d: The credit settlement may be performed first and the bet number settlement may be subsequently performed by one settlement operation. For example, in S56, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0, and when it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the credit is settled, and then the bet number is settled. When it is determined that the number is 0, the bet number may be settled.

Pattern e: The bet number may be settled by first adding credits for the number of bets in one settlement operation, and then the credit settlement may be performed subsequently. For example, when the set bet number is 3 and the credit is 40, the settlement operation is performed, and the bet amount is settled by adding 3 credits to the bet number and setting the credit to 43. Alternatively, the credit may be settled by paying out 43 medals. In this case, the value of the credit counter may exceed 50 due to the bet number adjustment performed by the adjustment operation. In this case, the value of the credit counter may be set to a value exceeding 50, or the amount of medals exceeding 50 may be paid out at the time of bet number adjustment.

[BET sound]
In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the BET sound is output when the automatic BET is placed after the first replay winning, and the BET sound is not output when the automatic BET is placed after the second or third replay winning. However, regardless of the type of replay that won the prize, the BET sound may not be output when the automatic BET is placed, and conversely, the BET sound may be output when the automatic BET is placed.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the presence or absence of a BET sound is determined by the type of BET command has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by determining the type of the re-gaming combination that has been won by the prize determination command, The presence/absence of a BET sound may be determined.

In the present embodiment, an example of performing a process of sequentially lighting the 1BETLED 14, 2BETLED 15 and 3BETLED 16 according to the value of the BET counter after the value of the BET counter is added, regardless of the type of the re-game combination won However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of lighting the 1BETLED 14, the 2BETLED 15, and the 3BETLED 16 in order is performed only after the automatic bet is made after the first replay winning, and the automatic bet is made after the second or third replay winning. The processing may not be performed after the processing.

In the present embodiment, an example in which a credit command (with BET sound) is output and a BET sound is output in S39 when a medal is inserted after the second or third replay winning is described, The present invention is not limited to this, and the BET sound may be output regardless of the type of replay that won the prize. For example, in S36, it may be determined whether or not it is a replay prize.

In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the BET sound is output up to the specified number when the credit is added after the replay winning. However, it is not limited to the case where the credit is added, and for example, one BET switch 5 or Even when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the BET sound may be output up to a specified number of times according to the operation.

[About pachinko machines]
Although the slot machine 1 has been described in the present embodiment and the modifications, the slot machine may be replaced with a pachinko gaming machine 200 described below. The pachinko gaming machine 200 partially includes the same configuration as the slot machine 1, and the description of the same configuration and processing will be omitted, and different configuration and processing will be described.

In the vicinity of the center of the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 200, an effect display device composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. When the game ball wins the predetermined winning opening, the special variable display device variably displays at least one of the special first special symbol and the second special symbol, and in the effect display device, the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display (variable display, update display, or cyclic display) of the effect design (decorative design) synchronized with at least one of the variable display is performed. The variable display of the effect symbols is executed in various variable modes such as scroll display. In the effect display device, an effect symbol display area for displaying effect symbols on the display screen is provided, and in the effect symbol display area, for example, three (plural) of "left", "middle", and "right" are provided. There is a symbol display area as a display region in which the effect symbols are variably displayed.

In the pachinko game machine 200, a game ball has won a predetermined winning opening, but a predetermined starting condition (when the variable display due to the reserved memory that is not in the big hit game and started and won earlier is completed) is established. If not, it is stored as the reserved storage information within the range of the predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). The reserved storage information is, for example, information for specifying whether to control in a specific game state (for example, a big hit state).

The pachinko gaming machine 200 is a "big hit" when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific symbol combination (big hit symbol combination) in the variable display caused by the pending storage, and is controlled to a specific game state.

In such a pachinko gaming machine 200, as shown in FIG. 20, with respect to a frame-shaped outer frame 100a, a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 100b and a glass door 100c can be opened and closed with the left edge thereof as a swing center. It is provided in.

A pair of upper and lower engaging projections 104 and 106 are provided near the edge of the front frame 100b opposite to the swing center. The engagement protrusions 104 and 106 are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 105 and 107 are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 104 and 106 of the outer frame 100a. By pressing the open front frame 100b against the outer frame 100a, the engagement protrusions 104, 106 ride over the engagement receiving pieces 105, 107, and in the overridden state, the engagement protrusions 104, 106 move downward by the biasing force of the spring. Move and be locked. In this way, the front frame 100b can be closed with respect to the outer frame 100a.

The store clerk pushes the pair of upper and lower engaging projections 104 and 106 upward against the biasing force of the spring by inserting the key into a key hole (not shown) and performing a releasing operation (for example, rotating clockwise). As a result, the engagement protrusions 104 and 106 are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 105 and 107, and the lock can be released. In this way, the front frame 100b can be opened with respect to the outer frame 100a.

Further, the front frame 100b is also provided with an engagement protrusion 103 for the glass door 100c, and an engagement hole 102 is provided in a portion of the glass door 100c facing the engagement protrusion 103. The engagement protrusion 103 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and by pushing the open glass door 100c against the front frame 100b, the engagement protrusion 103 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 102. By overcoming, the engaging protrusion 103 is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engaging protrusion 103 and the engaging hole 102 are engaged and locked. In this way, the glass door 100c can be closed with respect to the front frame 100b.

The clerk inserts the key into a key hole (not shown) and performs a releasing operation (for example, rotating it counterclockwise) to pull up the engagement protrusion 103 against the biasing force of the spring and engage with the engagement protrusion 103. The engagement with the hole 102 is released and the lock can be released. In this way, the glass door 100c can be opened with respect to the front frame 100b.

Such a pachinko gaming machine 200 may also have the following configuration similar to the slot machine 1.

For example, inside the outer frame 100a, a store-side setting switch 160 may be provided for making a reference setting of a performance mode during a game. Normally, with respect to the outer frame 100a, the front frame 100b is closed, so that only a store clerk who does not have a key for opening the front frame 100b cannot operate the store side setting switch 160. By operating the store-side setting switch 160, the store clerk can set the volume reference (first volume step) and the light amount reference (first light level).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 200, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 200 is in the ON state, the front frame 100b is opened, and the shop side setting switch 160 is operated, similarly to the shop side effect setting process shown in FIG. On the condition that the sound volume and the light quantity are set, the reference setting (the setting of the first sound volume step and the first light quantity step) may be possible. As a result, even in the pachinko gaming machine 200, even if the store-side setting switch is operated due to a fraudulent act, the reference setting of the volume and the light amount is prohibited when the front frame 100b is closed, and thus the reference of the volume and the light amount. It is possible to prevent the setting from being illegally performed, and it is possible to prevent the reference setting of the volume and the light amount from being performed by the clerk not intended.

For example, a player-side setting switch 170 for setting an effect mode during a game may be provided outside the front frame 100b (a lower portion of the front frame 100b shown in FIG. 21 and the like). Since the player-side setting switch 170 is located on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 200 when the front frame 100b is closed, it is operated by a player playing the pachinko gaming machine 200 from the outside. Can be operated. By operating the player side setting switch 170, the player can set the volume (second volume step) and the light amount (second light level step).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 200, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 200 is in the ON state, the front frame 100b is closed, and the player side setting switch 170 is the same as in the player side effect setting process shown in FIG. On the condition that the operation has been performed, a setting screen as shown in FIG. 13 may be displayed and the volume and the light amount may be set (the second volume level and the second light level). As a result, even in the pachinko gaming machine 200, even if the player-side setting switch 170 is operated by a person other than the player, setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front frame 100b is open. It is possible to prevent the volume and the light amount from being set by a person who does not intend.

In the store side effect setting process and the player side effect setting process in the pachinko gaming machine 200, it is determined whether or not the front frame 100b is open, and the setting related to the game is prohibited according to the determination result. there were. However, not limited to this, it may be determined whether or not the glass door 100c is opened in addition to the front frame 100b, and the setting relating to the game may be prohibited according to the determination result.

[About the gaming system]
A gaming system as shown in FIG. 21 may be constructed using the slot machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 200 in the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 21 shows an example of a game system using the pachinko gaming machine 200.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 200 displays a two-dimensional code on the liquid crystal screen when an operation to end the game is performed. As shown in FIG. 22, in the two-dimensional code, the number of jackpots and the number of reaches in this game, the number of times the missions executed during the game are cleared, the currently set volume data, the light amount data, etc. History information is added. The mobile terminal 901 can read the two-dimensional code and can exchange information by connecting to the management server 900 via the Internet network. In this way, the player can accumulate and store game history information in the management server 900.

Furthermore, the game history accumulated and stored in the management server 900 may be exchanged for points, and various benefits may be obtained depending on the points. For example, the points may be consumed to download music data, video data, applications, etc. to the mobile terminal 901.

In addition to the two-dimensional code or instead of the two-dimensional code, a password corresponding to the information on the game history may be displayed. The player may be able to take over the previous game history and play the game by inputting the password into the slot machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 200 at the start of the next game.

Furthermore, the player may display the two-dimensional code or password described above by operating the player-side setting switches 70, 170. Here, once the two-dimensional code and password are displayed once, if the two-dimensional code and password including the same information are not displayed at all thereafter, another person other than the player sets the player side setting switch 70, If the player touches 170 and operates it, what the player has played so far becomes useless. However, provided that the slot machine 1 (pachinko gaming machine 200) is powered on, the front door 1b (front frame 100b) is closed, and the player-side setting switch 70 (170) is operated. If a two-dimensional code or password is displayed, that is, even if the player-side setting switch 70 (70) is operated, when the front door 1b (front frame 100b) is open, the two-dimensional code or password is displayed. If the display is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code and the password from being displayed when the player does not intend.

Further, by operating the player side setting switches 70, 170, an input screen for inputting a password may be displayed, or the password may be input. Then, the power of the slot machine 1 (pachinko gaming machine 200) is ON, the front door 1b (front frame 100b) is closed, and the player-side setting switch 70 (170) is operated. The condition may be such that an input screen for inputting a password is displayed or the password can be input.

[Other modifications]
In the above-described embodiment, the variable display device having the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is provided, and one game ends when all reels are stopped, and the combination of the display results derived to the three reels is performed. I explained about the slot machine where the prize is generated. That is, a variable display device capable of deriving a display result to each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and using a gaming value for one game The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets, and one game is ended by deriving the display result to all of the plurality of variable display areas. The slot machine in which the winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the variable display areas has been described. However, one game is completed by deriving a display result on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and a prize is awarded according to the display result derived on the variable display device. The slot machine that can be generated is not limited to one having a variable display device having three reels, one having only one reel, and a slot machine having a variable display device having a plurality of reels other than three. May be

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the slot machine which sets the bet number using the medal and the credit is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using the game ball as the gaming value. It may be a slot machine to be set or a full credit type slot machine in which the bet number is set by using only credits as a gaming value. When the game ball is used as a game value, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls, and 15 game balls can be set when 3 is set as the bet number in the above embodiment. This is equivalent to setting the bet number using. Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of any one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and it is possible to use a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls together. May be That is, it is possible to set the number of bets and play the game by using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls depending on winning. It may be a slot machine that can pay out any of the above.

As the present embodiment, the slot machine for paying out the game medium to the player in accordance with the occurrence of the prize has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is paid to the player in accordance with the occurrence of the prize. An enclosed slot machine that adds game points (scores) without giving out may be adopted. The base and the drum can be distributed, and the housing is common, and only the base or the base and the drum are called a game machine.

In the present embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is exemplified, but the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, of the values within the range of 0% to 100%, It may be a value including 0%, a value including 100%, or a value not including 0% and 100%.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine will be described in detail. The pachinko gaming machine described below exemplifies the pachinko gaming machine 01 that describes another embodiment in addition to the pachinko gaming machine 200 described in FIG. Therefore, the details of the pachinko gaming machine 01 will be described with reference numerals different from those given to the details of the pachinko gaming machine 200.

FIG. 23 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 01 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 02 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 03 that supports and fixes the gaming board 02. On the game board 02, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball-striking launcher and struck.

A normal winning ball device 06A and a normal variable winning ball device 06B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 02. The normal winning ball device 06A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball device 06B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a normal open state in which the vertical position is set and an enlarged open state in which the tilted position is set by a solenoid 081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 06B, when the solenoid 081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning port. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 06B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 081 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. In addition, the normal variable winning ball device 06B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even when it is in the normally open state, but there is a possibility that the game ball enters as compared to when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning ball device 06B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and a normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 06A is detected by the first starting opening switch 022A shown in FIG. 24, for example. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 06B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 022B shown in FIG. The winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 022A is referred to as a first starting winning. In addition, the winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 022B is referred to as a second starting winning.

A predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed through (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 022A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning combination). Is paid out as a prize ball, and if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display device 04A. A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative pattern executed on the image display device 05 is established. A predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second start opening switch 022B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning opening). While the game ball is paid out as a prize ball, if the second special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second special symbol display device 04B is executed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative pattern executed on the image display device 05 is established. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first starting prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same or different from each other.

The first special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first starting prize) that are not immediately executed at the time of the occurrence of the first starting prize and are temporarily held for execution. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that has been satisfied first is being executed). That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 01 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the first special figure reservation storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning awaiting execution. The number of the 1st special figure reservation storage decreases one by one whenever one 1st start condition is materialized.

Information regarding the variable display corresponding to the first starting prize, in which the first starting condition according to a certain first starting prize is satisfied, but the first starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game according to the first starting prize is not satisfied Is stored (held) as suspension data (first special figure suspension information) until the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested first special figure suspension information.

The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start prize) that are not immediately executed when the second start prize is generated and are temporarily suspended for execution. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start is performed. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was previously satisfied is being executed). That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 01 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the second special figure reservation storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning in the execution waiting state. The second special figure reservation storage number is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

Information regarding the variable display corresponding to the second starting prize, in which the second starting condition according to a certain second starting prize is satisfied, but the second starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game according to the second starting prize is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game with the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested second special figure suspension information.

When the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "start winning opening". In addition, when the first starting prize and the second starting prize are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting prize”. Further, the number of reserved storages obtained by adding the number of first special figure reserved memories and the number of second special figure reserved memories is referred to as "total number of reserved memories". When the first special figure reservation storage number, the second special figure reservation storage number, and the total reservation storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as "special figure reservation storage number", but simply "special figure reservation". When referred to as "memory number", it may refer to any one or two of the first special figure pending storage number, the second special figure pending storage number, and the total pending storage number. Further, when the first starting condition and the second starting condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting condition” or “execution condition”. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start condition”. In addition, the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are simply referred to as “special figure reservation information” unless particularly distinguished.

A special variable winning ball device 07 is provided in a lower portion of the game area of the game board 02 (below the normal winning ball device 06A and the normal variable winning ball device 06B). The special variable winning ball device 07 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 082 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 24, and serves as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form a big winning hole.

As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 07, when the solenoid for the special winning opening door 082 is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 07, when the solenoid 082 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 07 is detected by the count switch 023 shown in FIG. 24, for example. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the count switch 023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 07, the game ball is opened to another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when they pass (enter). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 07, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 07, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening, and the game becomes difficult. The second state is disadvantageous for the person.

The first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol display device 04B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 02. The first special symbol display device 04A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 04B. The first special symbol display device 04A variably displays a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each (called variable display or variable display). To do. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 04B. The special symbols (special symbols) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 04A are also referred to as “first special symbols”, and the special symbols (special symbols) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 04B are “special symbols”. It is also referred to as "second special view". A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 04A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 04B. The (variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as “special figure game”.

The first special symbol display device 04A (similarly to the second special symbol display device 04B) has a plurality of types of numbers including "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", etc. as a special symbol game. Variable display of special symbols. A symbol number corresponding to each special symbol is attached to each special symbol. As an example, if each of the numbers indicating “0” to “9” is given a symbol number of “0” to “9”, and if the symbol of “−” is given a symbol number of “10” Good. In addition, the special symbol is not limited to the one configured from a number indicating “0” to “9”, a symbol indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, a lighting pattern such as the alphabet L or E) in which the combination of turning on and turning off the 7-segment LED are different are set in advance, and as special symbols. It may be displayed.

On the right side of the game area on the game board 02 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol display device 04B), the first reserved display 025A and the second reserved display 025B are provided. . The first hold indicator 025A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). The first hold display for enabling display is performed. For example, the 1st reservation display device 025A displays the 1st special figure reservation storage number so that specification is possible by the number of LED to light. For example, when the holding number of the first special figure game is increased by 1 due to the establishment of the new first starting condition, the number of lights is increased by 1, and the holding of the first special figure game is held due to the establishment of the new first starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one. The second hold indicator 025B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the second special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). The second hold display for enabling display is performed. For example, the second hold indicator 025B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, when the holding number of the second special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new second starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special figure game is put on hold by the establishment of the new second starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one.

On the left side of the game area on the game board 02, there are provided a passage gate 041, a normal symbol display 020, and a universal figure reservation display 0205C. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 041 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 021 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 041 has been detected by the gate switch 021, if the number of ordinary figure holding memories (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 020 The universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game (described later) executed in step 1 is established.

The normal symbol display device 020 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol display device 04B. The normal symbol display 020 variably displays (variable display) a normal symbol (also referred to as “general symbol” or “ordinary symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The variable display game in which the normal symbols are variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Information about the universal figure game in which the universal figure start condition is satisfied but the universal figure start condition (described later) is not stored is stored (held) as suspension data (public figure suspension information).

The universal figure pending display 0205C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending storages based on pending data (public figure pending information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The number of saved universal figure is the number of universal game that is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 041 is detected by the gate switch 021. Even if the universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game is established by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 021, but the general figure starting condition for permitting the start of the universal figure game is not established ( For example, when the previously established universal figure game is being executed), the execution of the relevant universal figure game is suspended (the relevant universal figure game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of public figure reservation storages is the number of game of the general figure game in the state of waiting for execution. The number of stored universal figure reservations decreases by one each time one universal figure start condition is satisfied.

An image display device 05 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 02. The image display device 05 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

In the display area of the image display device 05, a decorative pattern display area is arranged. In the decorative pattern display area, a decorative pattern that is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display). The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 05 is a first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 04A, or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 04B. Corresponding to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative designs is executed in the display area (decorative design display area).

As an example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the display area of the image display device 05, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 05L, 05C, 05R are arranged. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure Then, in each of the decorative design display areas 05L, 05C, 05R, the variation of the decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special drawing game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special drawing, in each of the decorative design display areas 05L, 05C, 05R, the decorative design that becomes the variable display result (the fixed design, the final design A stop pattern is also displayed). That is, in the display area (decorative design display areas 05L, 05C, 05R) of the image display device 05, the variation of the decorative design is started in association with (corresponding to) the first special figure game (or the second special figure game), The fixed decorative design (also called the final stop design) is stopped and displayed.

The decorative pattern is, for example, eight types of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images). Etc., and the character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as characters, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A symbol number corresponding to each decorative pattern is attached to each decorative pattern. As an example, each alphanumeric character indicating "1" to "8" may be assigned a symbol number of "1" to "8". Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a combination that causes a loss can be configured.

Variable display result of special symbols (also referred to as special symbol display result) Stop display to stop and display the fixed special symbol and end the variable display, and fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is variable display result of decorative symbol Stop display to stop and display the variable display, and stop display to display the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of normal symbols (also called public figure display result) and terminate the variable display, It is also referred to as a stop display, a final stop display, or a derivation display (or simply “derivation”). The variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily have to match the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time), It suffices if the change time is settled.

That is, the variation start timing of the decorative design may be later than the variation start timing of the special design, and the variation end timing of the special design (stop display timing of the fixed special design) is the variation end timing of the decorative design (stop of the fixed design) It may be later than the display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) that is one mode of the hold effect (described later).

Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be displayed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the derivation display of the fixed decorative design. In the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern whose fluctuation speed is “0” is displayed for a while, for example, with slight shaking or expansion/contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Includes those that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking, stretching, etc.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 05, a first starting prize winning memory display area 05HL and a second starting winning prize memory display area 05HR are arranged. In the first start winning a prize memory display area 05HL, as in the case of the first hold indicator 025A, a first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified. In the first start winning a prize memory display area 05HL, a second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner is performed, as in the second hold display 025B. That is, the number of the second special figure games which are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified.

In the first start prize winning memory display area 05HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holdings of the first special figure game is increased due to the establishment of the new first starting condition, if there is no other first holding display in the first starting winning prize memory display area 05HL, the first starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the right side of the area 05HL (the center side of the display area of the image display device 05), a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information, and the first start winning prize memory display area 05HL is added. If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (if there are a plurality of other first hold displays, further left of the leftmost first hold display). Additional displays may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning a prize memory display area 05HL and the hold number of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the first decrease Erase the first hold display (the first hold display that has been displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start prize winning memory display area 05HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information, Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

Further, in the second starting prize winning memory display area 05HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed by left-justifying. That is, when the number of holdings of the second special figure game is increased due to the establishment of the new second starting condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second starting winning prize memory display area 05HR, the second starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the left side of the area 05HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 05), a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and a second start winning prize memory display area 05HR is added. If there is another second hold display on the right side of the other second hold display (on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays), the new second hold display is displayed. Additional displays may be added.

In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold displays in the second start winning prize memory display area 05HR, if the number of hold of the second special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second decrease The second hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the second start prize winning memory display area 05HR (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). When the first start winning prize memory display area 05HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 05HR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting prize memory display area 05H".

In addition, in the display area of the image display device 05, in addition to the first starting prize winning memory display area 05HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 05HR, the first starting winning prize memory display area 05HL and the second starting winning memory display area 05HL are provided. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning prize memory display area 05HR (that is, the first special figure hold information that is consumed when the first start condition is satisfied, and the second special condition hold information that is consumed when the second start condition is satisfied). Display a special image showing information including active display (also referred to as variable correspondence display, display during digestion, this time display, etc.) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern executed based on the special figure hold information Active display area AHA (variable display area, active display area, active display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display area, current display area, current display Area (also referred to as an in-digestion display portion, etc.) is disposed, for example, between the first start prize winning memory display area 05HL and the second start prize winning memory display area 05HR.

In the pachinko gaming machine 01 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start winning prize memory display area 05HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 05HR, but it is active. The display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 05. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 01 in the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, the active display, or the active display of characters or images displayed around the active display frame or around the active display frame. Information and the like corresponding to are displayed by a special image.

In the game area of the game board 02, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game balls are provided in addition to the above-mentioned configuration. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general prize holes is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. .. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 03, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball serving as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor provided in the ball launch device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 03 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. An upper plate (striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 03, a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 01 is provided.

A stick controller 031A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 031A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operation rod). There is. With the trigger button, the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 031A with the operating hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. A trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation rod.

A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 02 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 01. Pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) that are arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 02 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 031A) or the like. It is provided. The push button 031B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 031B is installed, or the like, for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 031B.

A voice output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 03. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the speaker 08UL and the speaker 08UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 03, and the speaker 08LL and the speaker 08LR are installed at the lower left and right slant of the upper plate (upper left and right slant of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 08UL, 08UR, 08LL, and 08LR will be simply referred to as the speakers 08 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 08 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 08 outputs an effect sound based on the progress status of the game in the pachinko game machine 01 (also sound effects referred to), and outputs a warning sound in accordance with the situation of the pachinko game machine 01.

The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song, or the like that is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, message) or the like that is output according to the detection result of the switch or the sensor (for example, the detection of the winning in the first starting winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output according to an operation action on the push button 031B. Since the operation action on the push button 031B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output according to the operation action on the push button 031B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound to notify to request an operation action on the push button 031B, a voice, or a sound or voice to notify that a reach state (to be described later) is entered. , A sound, voice or the like that gives a notice or suggests that the jackpot game state will be entered before the jackpot game state is entered.

An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is open, and the like. ..

Inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 03, a light emitting portion (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or a decoration is provided. In FIG. 23, the light emitting unit is provided with a light emitting member 09CC at an upper position of the image display device 05, a light emitting member 09CL and a light emitting member 09CR at left and right positions of the image display device 05, and a light emitting member at an upper position of the gaming machine frame 03. 09U, the case where the light emitting member 09SL and the light emitting member 09SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 03 is illustrated. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 09CC, 09CL, 09CR, 09U, 09SL, and 09SR are not particularly distinguished, they are collectively referred to as the lamp 09. The lamp 09 may be composed of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. Regarding the lamp 09, in the lighting effect of lighting the lamp 09, one or a plurality of lamps are selected based on the lamp control data, and lighting control is performed in a predetermined lighting pattern. The light emitting member 09U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, the light emitting unit may be provided with various light emitting members around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 07 or the like) in the game area.

The image display device 05, the speaker 08, the lamp 09, and the like are effect devices that perform effects, but the gaming machine 01 may include other effect devices such as a movable accessory having a drive unit as effect devices.

The arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 04A, the second special symbol display device 04B, the normal symbol display 020 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold display 025A, the second hold display 025B, the universal figure hold display 0205C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 01, the general figure display 020 starts the general figure game on the basis that the general figure start condition is satisfied after the general figure start condition is satisfied. In the ordinary figure game, after starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol (after starting the variation of the ordinary symbol), when the predetermined time that is the ordinary symbol change time has elapsed, the fixed ordinary symbol that becomes the variable display result of the ordinary symbol Is stopped (displayed). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “a symbol for a regular symbol”. On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, for example, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is “general symbol loss”. Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion and opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 06B is in the tilt position. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

In the pachinko gaming machine 01, the special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 04A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second Based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, the special figure game (second special figure game) by the second special symbol display device 04B is started. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. Derivatively display the design (results of special figure display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the result is "big hit", and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is a "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 01 in the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" are big hit symbols, and the special symbols showing the number "2" are small hit symbols, The special symbol showing the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the first special symbol display device 04A by the first special symbol display device 04A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 04B. It may be a symbol, and a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 07 has a predetermined upper limit time. The special winning opening is opened for a period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 07 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

The special winning opening door is opened by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 02 after the special winning opening door is opened during the execution of the round, and then closing the special winning opening to make the special variable winning ball device. 07 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15"). Even before the number of times the round has been executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won in the special winning opening).

Of the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 07 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 07 is in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", "7" which are big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "7" are usually open round big hit symbols, and the number "5" The special design that indicates is a short-term open round jackpot design. In the special opening game special open game big hit pattern is controlled after the normal open round big hit pattern is derived, in the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the special game state, the special winning a prize ball device 07 big winning opening The door opens the special winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) which is a first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 07 is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed. The normal open jackpot state is also called the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the big-hit symbol is derived In the big-hit gaming state as a specific game state (short-term open big-hit state), a special variable winning ball device 07 is provided in each round. The upper limit time (upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened by the special winning opening door) for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state (for example, 0 . 1 second). It should be noted that in the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payout balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins the big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds or the like), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which a payout (prize ball) is not substantially obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also called the second specific game state.

In addition, the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state is not limited to the short-open period of the big winning opening compared to the big hit game state as the normal open round specific playing state. For example, the big winning opening is opened. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) that the special winning opening is opened It may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, the big hit game state as a short-term open round specific game state, the period during which the game ball is easily passed (entered) through the special winning opening in each round is longer than the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also shorter, and the number of times the round is executed is the second round number which is smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state, as long as it is at least one of them. ..

In this way, the big hit game state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. The advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a probability variation state (high probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state, in addition to the above-described big hit game state.

After the special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hitting game state, as in the short-term open big hitting state, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 07, the variable winning operation for changing the special winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is performed. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 07 in the first state (open state) is repeatedly executed for the second period.

In the decorative symbol display areas 05L, 05C, 05R arranged in the display area of the image display device 05, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 04B. In response to the start of one of the special figure games, the variable display of the decorative design is started. Then, in the decorative pattern display areas 05L, 05C, 05R, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern. There may be a predetermined reach state that forms part of the display combination.

The reach state refers to a decorative pattern (also referred to as a “reach variation pattern”) that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 05 constitutes a part of the big hit combination. Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative patterns are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching the reach (establishing the reach).

In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 05. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative pattern, or changing the changing mode of the decorative pattern, a performance effect different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The production operation such as the display of the character image and the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach production (or reach production display). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 05, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 08, the light emitting operation of the lamp 09 and the like (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation), etc. are performed before reaching the reach state. The operation mode may be different from the operation mode of 1.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different. Thereby, the jackpot expectation can be changed according to which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, a reach mode of normal reach and a reach mode of super reach, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach, are preset (prepared).

The jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed during the jackpot) x (probability that the jackpot will occur)/{(probability that the effect will be executed during the jackpot) x (probability that the jackpot will occur) + (except during the jackpot) (Probability that the effect is executed)×(probability of not being a big hit)} (when the big hit expectation degree is “1”, the variable display result is always a “big hit”).

Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as one mode of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a sliding effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like realized by a variable display operation of the decorative pattern or the like. In the sliding effect, after changing the decorative design in all the decorative design display areas 05L, 05C, 05R, in a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 05L, 05R, etc.) After the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" decorative design display area 05L) are displayed in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design. In the "right" decorative pattern display area 05R (either one or both), the decorative pattern is changed again, and then stopped and displayed, thereby effecting display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the sliding effect, after a plurality of decorative designs are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative designs is started until the fixed decorative design which is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the predetermined number of decorative designs is changed. By executing the display again, there are times when the variable display state of the decorative design becomes the reach state, and there is a case where the decorative pattern forming the non-reach combination without being in the reach state is stopped and displayed.

In the pseudo continuous production, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once, the fixed display that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative design is started By the time the symbols are derived and displayed, all the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 05L, 05C, 05R (for example, a predetermined pseudo consecutive chance or the like is part of any of the decorative pattern display areas 05L, 05C, 05R or (Displayed in all) is temporarily stopped and then, in the decorative pattern display areas 05L, 05C, 05R, re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all decorative patterns, is repeated a predetermined number of times ( (For example, up to 4 times).

In the present embodiment, the number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo continuous effect is variable display until all the decorative designs in the decorative design display areas 05L, 05C, 05R are first temporarily stopped (first variable. Number of times of display) (1 time), the number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after the temporary stop of all decorative patterns (1 time), and re-variable between the first variable display and the last variable display. The number of times X of display (X is 0 or 1 or more) is grasped as the number of times (X+1) that is one less than the number of times (X+2) added. Further, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number of times (temporary stop number) when all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 05L, 05C, 05R. The first variable display to the first temporary stop display is also referred to as the first pseudo continuous display, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display is also referred to as the second pseudo continuous display, and the third pseudo display. Variable display (second re-variable display) to third temporary stop display is also referred to as third pseudo-display, and fourth variable display (third re-variable display) to fourth temporary stop display for fourth time Also referred to as the pseudo-ream. Further, the number of pseudo consecutives in the pseudo consecutive production is also referred to as a pseudo consecutive variation number (or a pseudo consecutive number). In other words, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the number of revariable displays, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo runs such as the first time, the second time, the third time,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo run continues”.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable design is changed based on that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the re-variable display (re-change) once to four times. The display can be made to appear as if it was started two to five times in a row.

In the pseudo continuous production, before the reach is established in the variation (before the reach state is reached), the pseudo continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 05L, 05C, 05R. As described above, the decorative patterns in all the decorative pattern display areas 05L, 05C, 05R may be temporarily stopped, and after the reach is established, the decorative pattern display areas 05L, 05C, 05R are partially simulated. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 05L, 05C, 05R may be temporarily stopped so that the consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the production mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous production includes at least the production mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state and the production mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily displayed after the reach state. May be.

The sliding effect (similar to the pseudo continuous effect) may be a notice or a suggestion to the player that any one of the reach effects may be executed, that a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the jackpot expectation is high. .. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggesting to a player that any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the jackpot expectation degree is high may be collectively referred to as an announcement effect. The notice production may use a variable display operation different from the slide production and the pseudo continuous production in addition to the slide production and the pseudo continuous production, for example, a background image display, a message window display, There may be one that uses an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, voice output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, and extinction).

In the present embodiment, as the notice effect, it is common to change the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the variation and to not change the display mode of the special image. Includes common effects executed in. Further, the notice effect includes a success effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect, and a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect. The notice effect may include a suggestion effect that suggests a common effect. Further, similar to the common effect, the suggestive effect may be an effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. In other words, the case where the effect that suggests that the common effect is executed is called a suggestion effect, and the effect that suggests that either the success effect or the failure effect is executed (the common effect or the common effect is There is a case in which another effect is referred to as a suggestion effect.

The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether or not the notice or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reach state is at least the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to the winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before reaching the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to the prize of a certain game ball may be a “big hit” is at least the fixed decorative pattern due to the prize of the game ball being stopped and displayed. May be executed (started) before.

The notice performance may include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a “preliminary determination notice effect”). The pre-reading notice production determines whether or not the variable display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" before starting the noticeable variable display, based on the special drawing game hold information and the like. (Pre-reading) is a notice effect that is executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the prefetch notice presentation is called target hold information, the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display, and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display is referred to as the target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as the target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed while the target hold information is being consumed (when the target hold information is being consumed, including during variable display of the target) and before the target hold information. There is a case where it is executed while the pending information is being consumed, a case where the target pending information is being digested, and a case where the pending information prior to the target pending information is being digested.

A performance operation which is a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is performed by the player after the winning of the game ball (after the start condition is satisfied), and whether or not the content predicted by the pre-reading notice effect is realized. It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, due to the winning of a certain game ball, the effect of a pre-reading notice effect for notifying (indicating) the player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state is at least the decorative pattern due to the prize of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before the variable display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least the presentation operation of the pre-reading notice production for notifying (indicating) to the player in advance that the variable display result due to the winning of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" It may be executed (started) before the fixed decorative design by winning is stopped and displayed.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, etc., a fixed decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also called "indeterminate variation big hit combination") among a plurality of kinds of big hit combinations The design is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, a normal symbol of the same type (also referred to as “non-probable variation pattern”) on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 05L, 05C, 05R. Is a combination in which the final stop is displayed. An example of a normal design is, among the eight types of decorative designs with design numbers “1” to “8”, four types of decorative designs with even design numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. Is.

Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becomes the normal big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is displayed in a stopped state. , Which is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "indeterminate change" (also referred to as "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "non-probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the time reduction control (time saving control) is performed.

By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 01 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after turning on the power). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. In the time saving control, one of a condition that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is ended and that a variable display result is “big hit” is established first. Sometimes, you can finish.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variation big hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the fact that the reach state has been reached, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is "normal" is executed, etc., a predetermined probability variation big hit combination among a plurality of kinds of big hit combinations. In some cases, the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed is stopped and displayed. In other words, when the probability variation jackpot design is finally stopped and displayed in the special figure game, the decoration design which is the predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is finally stopped, and the decoration pattern which is the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases where it will be done. The predetermined probability variation big hit combination is, for example, a combination in which probability variation symbols of the same type are lined up on the activated line and finally stopped and displayed. An example of the probability variation pattern is, among the eight types of decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the four types of decorative symbols having the odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. Is.

Regardless of whether the fixed decorative design is a normal big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game is a "big hit". In this case, it is referred to as a variable display mode of "probability change" (also referred to as "big hit type"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after that, stochastic variation control (probability change control) is performed together with time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) is a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be finished when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled again after the big hit game state ends. Note that, like the time saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the probability variation control may be terminated when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall, which ends the probability variation control in the probability variation fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the jackpot gaming state is finished. ..

When the time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular symbol game (normal symbol variation time) by the regular symbol display 020 than in the normal state, or the variable of the regular symbol in each regular symbol game Control for improving the probability that the display result is "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 06B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port along with the time saving control is advantageous for the player, and is also called high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded opening state is higher than that in the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second starting condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 04B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, and then the variable display result is obtained. The time until it becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period in which the high opening control can be executed is also called a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period in which the time saving control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a highly accurate state. The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time saving control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a highly accurate low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control may be referred to as a “probability variation state” in particular, and may be referred to as a time saving probability variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate low base state. On the other hand, the certainty variation state in which only the certainty variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed (the highly accurate low base state) is sometimes referred to as the no-time saving certainty variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low accuracy high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low accurate low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in the game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be frequently executed, and each special figure game (first special figure game) is executed. By increasing the probability that the variable display result in the (drawing game, the second special drawing game) will be a "big hit", it becomes an advantageous state for the player. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative design may not be the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative designs predetermined as the opening opportunity may be stopped and displayed. Further, as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After a certain time, the fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "attack probability" (also referred to as "a sudden hit big hit" or "sudden probability big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "hit" big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time saving control.

As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled. After the end, the game state is not changed, and the variable display result is continuously controlled to the state before the small hit. However, if the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed and the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit game state ends, The special game state may end and the normal state may occur.

The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative design in which the fixed decorative design is a non-probable variation big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative design display areas 05L, 05C, 05R, after a temporary stop display of decorative designs that are usually a combination of big hits, the same decorative designs are made to fluctuate again, and a probability variation big hit combination is obtained. Either of the decorative pattern (probability variation pattern) and the decorative pattern (normal pattern) which is usually a combination of big hits may be finally stopped and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern.

After the fixed decorative pattern which is usually a big hit combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the big hit game state or during the execution of a round in the big hit game state, the next round starts after one of the rounds has ended in the big hit game state In the big hit game state, during the big hit game state, from the end of the last round to the start of the next variable display game, etc. The effect may be executed. The notification effect similar to the promotion effect during the big hit may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the big hit game state. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state is sometimes called "ending promotion production".

The pachinko gaming machine 01 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 011 as shown in FIG. 24, a production control board 012, a voice control board 013, and a lamp control board 014. The pachinko gaming machine 01 is also equipped with a relay board 015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 011 and the effect control board 012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 02 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 01.

The main board 011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01. The main board 011 is intended mainly for a setting function of random numbers used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 012 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 011 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) and the like that compose the first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol display device 04B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 020, controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 020 by performing lighting/extinguishing/coloring control of the normal symbol display 020, etc. It also has a control function.

From the game control microcomputer 0100 and the game control microcomputer 0100, for example, a switch circuit 0110 that captures detection signals from the game control microcomputer 0100 and various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 0100 on the main board 011. A solenoid circuit 0111 or the like for transmitting the solenoid drive signal of No. 1 to the solenoids 081, 082 is mounted.

The effect control board 012 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 011 and receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 011 via the relay board 015 to receive the image display device 05, the speaker 08, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as 09 are mounted. That is, the production control board 012 is an electric component for production such as a display operation in the image display device 05, a whole or a part of a sound output operation from the speaker 08, and a whole or a part of a lighting/extinguishing operation of the lamp 09 or the like. Is provided with a function for determining the control content for executing a predetermined effect operation.

The voice control board 013 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 012, and is for outputting sound from the speaker 08 based on a command or control data from the effect control board 012. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 014 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 012, and turns on/off the lamp 09 or the like based on a command or control data from the effect control board 012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit and so on.

As shown in FIG. 24, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 021, the first starting port switch 022A, the second starting port switch 022B, and the count switch 023 is connected to the main substrate 011. The gate switch 021, the first starting opening switch 022A, the second starting opening switch 022B, and the count switch 023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a sensor. If In addition to the gate switch 021, the first starting opening switch 022A, the second starting opening switch 022B, and the count switch 023, the gaming machine 01 also has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 011 as well. ) Switch for detecting the open/closed state, a switch for detecting the open/closed state of the game board 02 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves). In addition, on the main board 011, the first special symbol display device 04A, the second special symbol display device 04B, the normal symbol display 020, the first reserved display 025A, the second reserved display 025B, the ordinary figure reserved display 0205C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 011 to the effect control board 012 is relayed by the relay board 015. The control command transmitted from the main board 011 to the effect control board 012 via the relay board 015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 25A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 25(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command that specifies fluctuation start in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 04A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates variation start in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 04B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designating command that designates a variation pattern of the decorative design or the like that is variably displayed in each decorative design display area 05L, 05C, 05R corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special drawing game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 25(B), for example, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit” and the determination result of the big hit type. Is set.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the final stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 05L, 05C, 05R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 01. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 01, for example.

The command 9F00(H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is a production control board from the main board 011 when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after both the first special figure reservation storage number and the second special figure reservation storage number become 0. 012 is transmitted. The effect control CPU 0120 of the effect control board 012 that has received the wait demo designation command displays a predetermined customer wait demo screen on the image display device 05. The player displays a menu item on the image display device 05 by performing a predetermined operation on the operation unit such as the push button 031B while the demo screen is displayed, and, for example, adjusting the display screen of the image display device 05, Menu items such as adjusting the volume output from the speaker 08, inputting a password relating to the game history, and displaying a two-dimensional code relating to the game history can be implemented.
The predetermined time until the demo screen is displayed elapses when it is assumed that the player is absent after the power is turned on. On the other hand, the predetermined time until the demo screen is displayed also passes by the player explicitly interrupting the game in order to display the menu items after the variable display of the special symbols ends. When the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the effect control CPU 0120 may change the effect mode such as the display of the demo screen depending on the state of the gaming machine (for example, whether or not the power is just turned on).

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round has been executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term jackpot opening state. Is set.

The command B100H is the first special prize based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 06A is detected by the first starting opening switch 022A and the first starting winning occurs. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition in order to execute the 1st special figure game due to the design indicator 04A is satisfied.

The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 06B is detected by the second starting opening switch 022B and the second starting winning occurs. It is the second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special drawing game by the special symbol display device 04B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the first special figure reserved storage number such that it can be specified in the first start winning prize storage display area 05HL or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second starting prize winning memory display area 05HR and the like so that it can be specified.

In the present embodiment, as the reserved storage information, a first starting mouth winning designation command and a second starting mouth winning designation command for designating whether the first starting winning opening has been won or the second starting winning opening has been won. Along with the transmission, a first reserved storage number notification command and a second reserved storage number notification command that specify the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are also transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages addition designation command (first reserved storage count addition designation command or second designation (Reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted while the number of reserved storages decreases, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first 1 reserved storage number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved storage number addition designation command (total reserved storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be transmitted.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning-time determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command showing the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" is there. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as the winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative patterns that are categorized into a common group. The command C8XXH is an effect control command (error designation command) that indicates the occurrence of an error and its content (type). In the command C8XXH, different EXT data is set according to the type of error.

In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 37(A)), when the start winning occurs, the variable display result is determined as "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Whether or not it is determined to be a "small hit", and when it is determined to be a "big hit", the type of the big hit is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control board 012. Based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the effect control CPU 0120 mounted on the effect control board 012 determines whether the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" and determines the big hit type. In addition to being recognizable, the variation category can be recognized based on the value set in the variation category command.

The effect control commands such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 0120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 05, the speaker 08, the lamp 09, etc.). Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 05 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 08 is a voice control command, and the light emission operation of the lamp 09 ( The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. It should be noted that some of the effect control commands may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

The game control microcomputer 0100 mounted on the main board 011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 0101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 0102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 0103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 0103. A random number circuit 0104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 0105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 0100, the CPU 0103 executes a program read from the ROM 0101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01. At this time, the CPU 0103 reads fixed data from the ROM 0101, a fixed data read operation, the CPU 0103 writes various variable data in the RAM 0102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 0103 various data temporarily stored in the RAM 0102. Variable data read operation of reading data, CPU0103 is a receiving operation of receiving various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 0100 via I/O0105, and CPU0103 of the game control microcomputer 0100 via I/O0105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside is also performed.

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 011 side. As shown in FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, on the main substrate 011 side, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, and the universal figure. Numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The random number circuit 0104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 0103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 0104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 0154 shown in FIG. 30, to update various numerical data by software, thereby random number values MR1 to Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

Next, the variation pattern of the decorative design will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is referred to as “loss variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern corresponds to the "non-reach variation pattern ("non-reach variation pattern" "non-reach" when the variable display result of the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach". (Also referred to as "(miss) variation pattern")", or "variable display result of "variable", "reach variation pattern ("reach lost variation pattern") corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" Also referred to as ")".

A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a “big hit variation pattern” corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” and a “small hit variation pattern” corresponding to the variable display result being “small hit”. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the big hit types may be prepared.

In the non-reach variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times are prepared in response to the time saving control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large or when the game state is the probability variation state or the time reduction state. Good. As a result, any one of the variation patterns is selected according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state, so that it is possible to control the variation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state.

For the variation patterns including the reach effect such as the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the variation patterns corresponding to the reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. A variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as a “normal reach variation pattern”, and a variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is performed is referred to as a “super reach variation pattern”.

FIG. 27 shows a specific example of the fluctuation category and the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In FIG. 27, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened/non-reach (miss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (miss) variation category. The variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA3”. The variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (miss) variation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PB3”. The variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB5”.

The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (loss). The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the sliding effect is executed. The special figure change time of the change pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure change time of the change pattern “PA2-1” because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the sliding effect is executed. The variation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than that of the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). In addition, the variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as the super reach α (loss). The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a guise. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a guise. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as super reach β (loss). The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The variation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). In addition, the variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super-reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as the super-reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB5-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB5" is a super-reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is normally long as super-reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

Note that, in FIG. 27, description of the variation pattern when the big hit type of the small hit variation pattern and the big hit variation pattern is abrupt is omitted, but the loss variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern, described in FIG. 27) is omitted. Reach loss variation pattern) and big hit variation pattern (except when the big hit type is abrupt).

The ROM 0101 provided in the game control microcomputer 0100 shown in FIG. 24 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 0101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 0103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. In the ROM 0101, data (for example, information specifying the content of the control command) forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 0103 to transmit control signals which are various control commands from the main board 011 and a diagram. Data and the like that form the table as shown in 27 are stored.

FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 0101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 0130A shown in FIG. 28A and a second special figure display result determination table 0130B shown in FIG. It is prepared. In the first special symbol display result determination table 0130A, a fixed special symbol which is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 04A is derived and displayed. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, or whether to control the variable display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state, for determining the special figure display result 3 is a table that is referred to for making a determination based on the random number value MR1. In the second special symbol display result determination table 0130B, a fixed special symbol which is a variable display result in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 04B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, or whether to control the variable display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state, for determining the special figure display result 3 is a table that is referred to for making a determination based on the random number value MR1.

In the first special map display result determination table 0130A, the special map display depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 01 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). The numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". In the second special figure display result determination table 0130B, the special state display result determination disorder depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the probability variation state (high certainty state). The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In each of the first special figure display result determination table 0130A and the second special figure display result determination table 0130B, when the gaming state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More decision values than the times are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 01, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). The probability of being determined to control the state increases.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 0130A, the determined value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 0130B, the determined value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, a "small hit" does not occur in the second special figure game, so a normal variable winning ball device 06B, such as a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a positive change state (high accurate high base state), is formed. In the gaming state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a “small hit” where it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game. .

In the second special figure display result determination table 0130B and the first special figure display result determination table 0130A, different predetermined range determination values may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 0130B, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table 0130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of "small hit" in the gaming state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 06B. Alternatively, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to a common special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

FIG. 29 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 0131 stored in the ROM 0101. The jackpot type determination table 0131 determines the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the jackpot type determination random number MR2 when it is determined to control the jackpot game state by setting the special figure display result to "jack". Is a table that is referred to for. In the jackpot type determination table 0131, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 04A (special symbol game using the first special symbol) is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 04B. Depending on whether (special game using the second special diagram) is executed, the numerical value (determined value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probable change", "probable change", "probable change". Is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 0131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a variable special figure) is the first special figure, the determined value of the predetermined range ( (Values in the range of "82" to "99") are assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", on the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, No decision value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, since it is not a "probability" in the second special figure game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting prize hole formed by the normal variable prize ball device 06B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult “probability” and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the extension of the game.

Note that different predetermined range determination values may be assigned to jackpot types of "probability" depending on whether the variation special map is the first special figure or the second variation special figure. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that in the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type “probability”. As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “probability” in the gaming state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 06B. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data when the variation special map is the first special figure and the second special figure.

Further, the ROM 0101 stores a fluctuation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of fluctuation categories. Specifically, the ROM 0101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 0101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determination values (for example, the range and number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation category from a plurality of types of variation categories. There is. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information of all variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 0101.

Further, the ROM 0101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 0101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that differ from each other in the types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. That is, the ROM 0101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables that have different determination values (for example, the range of the determination value, the number of determination values, etc.) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. There is. Note that instead of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables, one large fluctuation pattern determination table including information of each fluctuation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 0101.

The RAM 0102 included in the game control microcomputer 0100 shown in FIG. 24 may be a backup RAM part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 01 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 0102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least the data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. Data according to the control state of the game control means, when the power is restored after the occurrence of a power outage, etc., the data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power outage (for example, a special figure Process flag, etc.). Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 0102 is provided with a game control data holding area 0150 as shown in FIG. 30, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 01. There is. The game control data holding area 0150 shown in FIG. 30 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 0151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 0151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 0151C, a game control flag setting unit 0152, and a game. It has a control timer setting unit 0153, a game control counter setting unit 0154, and a game control buffer setting unit 0155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 0151A is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 06A and the first starting winning has occurred, but has not yet started ( Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 04A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 0151A associates a winning number into the first starting winning opening (detection order of game balls) with a holding number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 0103 based on passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 0104 or the like is stored as reservation data (first special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 0151B is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 06B and the second starting winning has occurred, but has not yet started. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 04B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 0151B associates a winning number in the second start winning opening (detection order of game balls) with a reservation number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 0103 based on passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 0104 or the like is stored as pending data (second special figure pending information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

In addition, the holding data of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 04A (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition), and the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 04B The hold data (the second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in a common hold storage unit in association with the hold number.

The universal figure hold storage unit 0151C holds the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 041 by the gate switch 021 but has not been started by the normal symbol display 020. Information). For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 0151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 041, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 0104 or the like by the CPU 0103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reservation data (universal figure reservation information) is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 0152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01. For example, the game control flag setting unit 0152 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The game control timer setting unit 0153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01. For example, the game control timer setting unit 0153 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 0154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 0154, the first reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number, and the second special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved storage counter for counting, the total reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage counter for counting the total reserved storage, and the like. Remembered.

The game control buffer setting unit 0155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 0155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I/O 0105 included in the game control microcomputer 0100 shown in FIG. 24 is an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 0100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 0100. And an output port for transmitting the signal.

As shown in FIG. 24, the production control board 012 is provided with a production control CPU 0120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 0121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area for the production control CPU 0120. RAM 0122, a display control unit 0123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 05, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the effect control CPU 0120. A circuit 0124 and an I/O 0125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 012, the effect control CPU 0120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 0121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 0120 reads fixed data from the ROM 0121, a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 0120 writes various variable data to the RAM 0122 and temporarily stores the various data, and the effect control CPU 0120 uses the RAM 0122. The variable data read operation of reading various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the production control CPU 0120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the production control board 012 via the I/O 0125. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 012 via the I/O 0125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 0120, the ROM 0121, and the RAM 0122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 012.

To the effect control board 012, wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 05, and for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the voice control board 013. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illumination signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 014, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 012, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of the player to the stick controller 031A is transmitted from the controller sensor unit 035A, and a game to the push button 031B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 035B is also connected.

In the effect control board 012, for example, by the random number circuit 0124, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation are updatable counted. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

In the ROM 0121 mounted on the effect control board 012 shown in FIG. 24, various data used for controlling the progress of the game are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 0121 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 0120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

For example, the ROM 0121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to for determining the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning prize storage display area 05HL to any one of a plurality of types. There is. Specifically, the ROM 0121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display. . It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 0121.

Further, for example, the ROM 0121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to for determining the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start prize winning storage display area 05HR to any one of a plurality of types. Has been done. Specifically, the ROM 0121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display. . It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 0121.

Further, the ROM 0121 stores a hold effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether to execute a hold effect (also referred to as action effect or hold change effect). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining presence/absence of execution of the hold effect is determined whether the hold effect is executed or not. It is assigned. In the present embodiment, the holding effect refers to a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first starting prize winning memory display area 05HL into a notice mode, and the second starting winning prize memory display area 05HR. And a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the displayed hold display to the notice mode. There are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 05 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is a hold change effect where a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 05 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

Further, the ROM 0121 stores an active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the active display change effect (success effect) that changes the special image including the active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence/absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed, whether the active display change effect is executed or not. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) of changing the special image to a notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, the information corresponding to the active display (for example, the active display or the characters or images displayed around the active display frame or around the active display frame) are used as the notice mode. It is a production (main announcement production) to be changed. As described above, in the active display change effect, the common effect, the success effect executed when changing the special image after executing the common effect (also referred to as active display change effect), and the common effect are executed. A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gaze effect) that is executed later when the special image is not changed is included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 05 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not affecting the special image in the display area of the image display device 05, or a special image that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 05. It is an effect that does not change the display mode.

Further, in the ROM 0121, a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 0120 to control effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 05, the speaker 08, the lamp 09, the effect model, etc.) are configured. Data and the like to be stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative designs, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), etc. are realized.

The various effect control patterns are composed of data showing the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite display of the fixed special symbol that is the special symbol display result is displayed. Variable display operation of symbols, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect operations without variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for display mode of hold display in first start winning memory display area 05HL) Effect, and hold effect for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning prize memory display area 05HR), and the like, and the like, and the like, and the like, and the like, which are configured to include data indicating the control contents of various effect operations.

FIG. 31A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various production operations such as production control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code, It suffices to set the contents of various kinds of effect control, the switching timing of effect control, and the like in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control of a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control CPU 0120. Therefore, the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 011 or a predetermined process is executed in the effect control CPU 0120 as a process for controlling the effect operation. As described above, data indicating the switching timing of effect control may be set corresponding to the predetermined control content or processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 05, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 05. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 08, such as data indicating an output mode of effect sound and the like linked to the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating the voice output operation from the speaker 08. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 09 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 09. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the push button 031B is effectively detected, control content of the effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies the effect operation according to the operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data need not be included in all the effect control patterns, and an effect control pattern configured to include some control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

FIG. 31(B) is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 0120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 05. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 08 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 09 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and is specified by the operation detection control data. During the operation valid period, the control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 031A or the push button 031B and determining the effect contents is performed. It should be noted that dummy data (data that does not specify control) may be set in the data corresponding to the effect parts that are not controlled even though they correspond to the effect control process timer determination value.

The production operation shown in FIG. 31(B) corresponds to the entire period from the start to the final stop of the variation of the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, the period for performing the notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the production operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state, etc.) Effect control pattern may be provided.

When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 0121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 0122, or the ROM 0121 of the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern. The storage address in 1 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 0122, and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 0121 may be designated. After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to various corresponding control data. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 0120, according to the contents of the process data #1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 05, speaker 08, lamp 09, Control of movable members etc. included in the production model is advanced. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and voice control data #1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values #1 to #n. The data #n, the lamp control data #1 to the lamp control data #n, the operation detection control data #1 to the operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and designate the execution of effect control. The effect control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 0120 to the display control unit 0123, the voice control board 013, the lamp control board 014, and the like. In the display control unit 0123 which has received the command from the effect control CPU 0120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM to develop the image data. Further, in the voice control board 013 which receives the command from the effect control CPU 0120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like to develop the voice data. .

In the RAM 0122 mounted on the effect control board 012 shown in FIG. 24, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, an effect control data holding area 0190 as shown in FIG. 32A, for example. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 0190 shown in FIG. 32A includes an effect control flag setting unit 0191, an effect control timer setting unit 0192, an effect control counter setting unit 0193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 0194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 0191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 05 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 011. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 0191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The effect control timer setting unit 0192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 05. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 0192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 0193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 0193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 0194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 0194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, data forming the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 0194A as shown in FIG. 32B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 0194. The first start prize-winning reception command buffer 0194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved storage number (for example, "4"). .. When there is a start winning prize to the first start winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variation category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 011 to the effect control board 012. In the first start winning award reception command buffer 0194A, of these commands, a storage area is secured so that the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 0120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start winning prize from the beginning in the empty area of the first start winning prize reception command buffer 0194A. At the time of the first start winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the first starting winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in the storage areas corresponding to the respective buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the starting mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation The category command and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. Note that, in FIG. 32B, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

The commands stored in the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 0194A shown in FIG. 32(B) are deleted one by one each time the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the variable is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first starting opening winning award designation command. One deleted command (one set) is deleted, and the command is stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the command associated with the first start mouth prize designation command). However, it is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 32B, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” becomes the buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the data forming the second start-up winning prize reception command buffer 0194B as shown in FIG. 32C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 0194. A storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (eg, “4”) is provided in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 0194B. .. When there is a starting winning prize to the second starting winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning designation command (second starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved storage number notification command (a second reserved storage number notification command) ) Is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 011 to the effect control board 012. In the second start winning award reception command buffer 0194B, a storage area is secured so that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number notification command among these commands can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 0120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the second start winning a prize from the beginning in the empty area of the second start winning award reception command buffer 0194B. At the time of the second start winning a prize, the command transmission is performed in the order of the second starting award winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is normally received, as shown in FIG. 32(C), the second starting opening winning award designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, respectively. , The variable category command, and the pending storage number notification command are stored in that order. Note that, in FIG. 32C, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

The commands stored in the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 0194B shown in FIG. 32(C) are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second starting opening winning award designation command. One deleted command (1 set) is deleted, and the command is stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the command associated with the second start mouth prize designation command). However, it is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 32(C), the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

Further, in the present embodiment, data forming the first prefetching notice buffer 0194C as shown in FIG. 32D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 0194. The first pre-reading notice buffer 0194C is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the first start winning award reception command buffer 0194A. That is, the first read-ahead notice buffer 0194C stores the determination contents regarding the read-ahead notice effect related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 0120, etc. in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start-up winning command buffer 0194A of FIG. 32B due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, etc. In the 1-readahead notice buffer 0194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. In addition, due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, etc., in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 0194A of FIG. 32B, the reserved data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is changed to another buffer number When it is shifted to, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetching notice buffer 0194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, data forming the second prefetching notice buffer 0194D as shown in FIG. 32E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 0194. The second pre-reading notice buffer 0194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 0194B. That is, in the second prefetching notice buffer 0194D, the determination contents regarding the prefetching notice effect regarding the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 0120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. To be done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning award reception command buffer 0194B of FIG. 32C due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, 2 In the prefetch advance notice buffer 0194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Also, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc., in the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 0194B of FIG. When it is shifted to, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetching notice buffer 0194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 01 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 0100 is activated, and the CPU 0103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 0103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 0102 is cleared. In addition, register setting of CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 0100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 0103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 0103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 01 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be entered.

When the CPU 0103 which has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the CPU 0103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 021, the first start port switch 022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 0110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 022B and the count switch 023 is determined (S011). Hereinafter, S is simply referred to as S. Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 01 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S012). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 01 is output (S013). ).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 011 side by software is executed (S014). After this, the CPU 0103 executes special symbol process processing (S015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 0152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 01, and the first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the display device 04B and the opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 07 in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (S016). The CPU 0103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display 020 by executing the ordinary symbol process process, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable in the normally variable winning ball device 06B. It enables setting of tilting motion of winglets.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 0103 transmits a control command from the main board 011 to the sub-side control boards such as the effect control board 012 by executing the command control processing (S017). As an example, in the command control process, one of the output ports included in the I/O 0105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 0155, the production control After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the board 012, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. From the above, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enable state, the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

34 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S015 shown in FIG. 33 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 0103 first executes a start winning determination process (S0101). FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S0101 of FIG. 34 as the start winning determination processing. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S0208 and S0211 of FIG. FIG. 37(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S0220 of FIG. 36 as the winning random number determination process.

In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 0103 first detects signals from the first starting port switch 022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 06A. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening switch 022A is turned on (S0201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 022A is on (S0201; YES), the first special figure reservation storage number (the first special figure game reservation number) is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether it is “4”) (S0202). CPU0103 should just specify the 1st special figure reservation storage number by reading the 1st reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the 1st reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting part 0154, for example. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in S0202 (S0202; NO), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 0155 is set to "1" (S0207).

When the first starting opening switch 022A is off in S0201 (S0201; NO), when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in S0202 (S0202; YES), the processing of S0209 was executed. After that, based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 06B, whether or not the second starting port switch 022B is ON. Is determined (S0203). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 022B is on (S0203; YES), the second special figure reservation storage number (second special figure game reservation number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether it is “4”) (S0204). CPU0103 should just specify the 2nd special figure reservation storage number by reading the 2nd reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the 2nd reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting part 0154, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in S0204 (S0204; NO), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 0155 is set to "2" (S0210).

After the processing of S0207 is executed, the processing for starting winning (FIG. 36) is executed (S0208), the value stored in the starting opening buffer is "0 (initialized)" (S0209), and the processing proceeds to S0203. After executing the processing of S0210, the processing for starting winning (FIG. 36) is executed (S0211), the value stored in the starting opening buffer is set to “0 (initialization)” (S0212), and the winning determination processing for starting is ended. .. As a result, even when the first winning opening switch 022A and the second starting opening switch 022B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the game ball, it is possible to complete the processing based on the respective detections.

The CPU 0103 updates the special figure reservation storage number according to the starting mouth buffer value, which is the value stored in the starting mouth buffer, by adding 1 as the starting winning process (S0208, S0211) (S0215 in FIG. 36). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second suspension storage count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved storage number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the process of S0215, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (S0216). For example, the total reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 0154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the processing of S0216, the CPU 0103 selects from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 0104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 0154, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determining. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (S0217). Numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit 0151 corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (S0218). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 0151A, while when the starting mouth buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 0151B.

Subsequent to the processing of S0218, the transmission setting of the starting mouth winning designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (S0219). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 0101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and so on. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 012 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 0101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 012 The setting for transmitting the second start opening winning a prize designation command is performed. The start opening winning award designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 011 to the effect control board 012 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S017 shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

Following the process of S0219, a winning random number determination process is executed (S0220). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 0101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 012. Is set (S0221). The reservation storage number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 011 to the effect control board 012 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S017 shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

As the winning random number determination process (S0220), the CPU 0103 confirms the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 01 by, for example, checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 0152 and the like. It specifies (S0401 of FIG. 37(A)). The CPU 0103 specifies that the probability variation state is the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of S0401, from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table 0130A or the second special figure display result determination table 0130B, starting mouth buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current game The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected corresponding to the state (S0402). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 0130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table 0130B is set in the usage table. Then, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in S0217 of FIG. 36 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (S0403). In the jackpot determination range, the individual determination values assigned to the "big hit" special figure display results in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of S0402 are set, and the CPU 0103 determines each random value MR1 and each determination. It suffices to be able to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 0103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by making a comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a “jackpot” (jump jack start determination). it can.

When it is determined in S0403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (S0403: NO), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (S0404). The CPU 0103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the decision value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of S0402. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range. When it is determined in S0404 that it is not within the small hitting determination range (S0404; NO), in order to transmit the symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” to the effect control board 012. Is set (S0405).

When it is determined in S0404 that it is within the small hit determination range (S0404; YES), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is transmitted to the effect control board 012. Settings are performed (S0407).

When it is determined in S0403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (S0403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S0409). At this time, the CPU 0103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. From the table data forming the jackpot type determination table 0131, the jackpot type determination table data is selected. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. The setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the determination result by the process of S0409 to the effect control board 012 is performed (S0410).

After performing any of the processes of S0405, S0407, and S0410, the variation category is determined (S0412). That is, the variation category is determined to be one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. In the processing of S0412, the CPU 0103 has a plurality of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 0101 (a plurality of types of variation category determination tables in which types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, respective determination rates, etc. are different from each other). ), any one of the variable category determination tables to be set as the usage table is selected.

Specifically, the CPU 0103, the special figure display result (for example, the determination result of S0403 or S0404, etc.), the number of pending storage (for example, the storage value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 0154) Any one of the variable category determination tables to be set as the usage table is selected based on the first reserved storage number count value). Subsequently, the CPU 0103 creates a variation category determination table set as a usage table and numerical data indicating a variation category determination random number MR3 extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 0104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 0154. Based on this, one of the plurality of types of variation categories is determined.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referenced to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 39(A) is an example of the configuration of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) by a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 39B is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to another variation category determination table. FIG. 39C is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to still another variation category determination table. FIG. 39C is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to still another variation category determination table. Note that, for simplification of description, the variation category determination table in which the determination rate as shown in FIG. 39(A) is set may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table of FIG. 39(A). The same applies to FIGS. 39B to 39D and other determination tables such as the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 38 is a selection example of selecting one of the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 39A to 39D, that is, the above-described selection example. It is a selection example of selecting one of the four variation category determination tables.

The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 39(A) (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 39(B), the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 39(C), FIG. 39) In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D)), a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 39(A), 0 of the 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random number value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range of “0” to “69”) are assigned to “PA1”, and 27 (values in the range of “70” to “96”) are assigned to variation category “PA2”. “PA3” is assigned, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. There is. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 39A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70÷100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a rate of 27% (27/100), the variation category "PA4" is 2% (2/100), and the variation category "PA5" is 1% (1/100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” of FIG. 39(B), four (“0” of 100 determined values of the random number MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”)). ] To "3") is assigned to the variation category "PA1", 85 (values in the range "4" to "88") are assigned to the variation category "PA2", and eight ("89"). ] To “96”) is assigned to the variation category “PA3”, two (values in the range “97” to “98”) to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “value”). 99") is assigned to the variation category "PA5". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” of FIG. 39B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85÷100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8÷100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2÷100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1÷100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 39(C), 64 (“0” of 100 determined values of the random number MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”)) are set. ”To “63”) are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, 25 (values in the range “64” to “88”) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, and eight (“89”). ] To “96”) is assigned to the variation category “PA3”, two (values in the range “97” to “98”) to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “value”). 99") is assigned to the variation category "PA5". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “CTBL3” in FIG. 39C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25÷100), the variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8÷100), variation category “PA4” at a rate of 2% (2÷100), and variation category “PA5” at a rate of 1% (1÷100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 39(D), 20 (“0” of 100 determined values of the random number MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”)) ] To “19”) is assigned to the variation category “PB3”, 40 (values in the range “20” to “59”) are assigned to the variation category “PB4”, and 40 (“60”). "To a value in the range of "99") is assigned to the variation category "PB5". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 39D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20÷100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40÷100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40÷100).

In the setting examples of FIGS. 39(A) to 39(C), when the special figure display result is “miss”, when the number of pending storages is large, the shortening/non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “miss” and the number of pending storages is “4”. > When the special map display result is “miss” and the number of pending storage is “3” or “2”, the determination rate “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” The determination rate of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “miss” and the number of pending storages is “1” is “0%”.

In the setting examples of FIGS. 39(A) to 39(C), when the special map display result is “miss”, the variation category of the super reach (miss) is large or small even if the number of pending storage is large or small. The variation category "PA4" or the variation category "PA5") is fixed at a fixed rate. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3", the determination rate of the variation category "PA5" is " 1%”, and the determination rate of the variation category “PA4” is “2%”.

In addition, in the setting examples of FIGS. 39A to 39C, any one of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even if there is, the determined value of the random number value MR3 that corresponds to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined) exists. That is, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value, it is either the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is "99", it is one of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3". Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables.

Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the variation category determination tables described above. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "64" to "69", the variation category "PA2" is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value (a value in each range described above), it is determined that the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, or the super reach β is performed in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 39A to 39C, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Accordingly, it is possible to easily determine in advance that at least the reach is not reached.

After that, according to the determination result (determination result) of the processing of S0412, after performing setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 37B to the production control board 012 (S0413). The winning random number determination process ends.

After executing the start winning determination process in S0101 of FIG. 34, the CPU 0103 selects and executes any of the processes of S0110 to S0120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 0152. To do.

The special symbol normal process of S0110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" is decided (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

The variation pattern setting process of S0111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting processing includes processing for determining the fluctuation pattern as any of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 27, a first fluctuation start command (or second fluctuation start command), a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command. It includes a transmission setting process and the like for transmitting information such as. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

The special symbol variation process of S0112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol display device 04B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing It includes a process for measuring For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S0112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value which is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 0153 is subtracted from or added to 1, and the first It is the first special figure game by the special symbol display device 04A (special figure game using the first special figure), or the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 04B (special figure using the second special figure) Whether the game) or not, a common timer measures the elapsed time. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of S0112 may be a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special figure game or the second special figure game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process of S0113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol display device 04B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 0152 is turned on. If the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". To be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The big hit opening preprocessing of S0114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., there is a processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and making settings for opening the big winning opening. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the jackpot type is "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probability". As an example, the big hit type corresponds to "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the maximum winning number is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type corresponds to "probability", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "0.1 seconds", and the number of opening of the special winning opening is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed. By setting "15 times", the short-term open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process of S0115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 023, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 082 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". .

The post-big hit opening process of S0116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number of times, reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, it includes a process of making settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command. When the number of executions of the round does not reach the maximum winning opening maximum number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum value is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of S0117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state by the effect devices such as the image display device 05, the speaker 08, the lamp 09, and the like. It includes a process of waiting until and a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit opening pre-processing of S0118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the variable display result is "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set in the same manner as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". It is only necessary to set "0.1 seconds" and to set the number of times of opening the special winning opening to "15 times" to set the small hitting game state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hitting open process of S0119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 082 for the special winning opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10".

The small hitting end processing of S0120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". In this small hit completion processing, the production device such as the image display device 05, the speaker 08, the lamp 09, etc. waits until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed. It includes processing to do. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 01 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S0110 of FIG. 34 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 0103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is “0” (S0231). That is, the CPU 0103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is held. For example, in the process of S0231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 0154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of second special figure reservation storages is other than "0" in S0231 (S0231; NO), the special data is stored as the reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 0151B corresponding to the reservation number "1". The random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (S0232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

Subsequent to the process of S0232, the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1 by updating the second reserved storage number count value by one, and the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1, as well. In 0151B, the reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry ( S0233). Further, in the process of S0233, the game control counter setting unit 0154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter. At this time, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (S0234).

When the number of second special figure reservation storages is "0" in S0231 (S0231; YES), it is determined whether the number of first special figure reservation storages is "0" (S0235). That is, the CPU 0103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is held. For example, in the process of S0235, the game control counter setting unit 0154 may read the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter and determine whether or not the read value is "0". ..

In this way, the process of S0235 is executed when it is determined in S0231 that the number of second special figure pending storage is “0”, so that the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. 2 is held, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to the mode in which the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) through the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the starting prizes (first starting prize, second starting prize) are generated. In this case, it suffices to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine which of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in S0235 (S0235; NO), the special data is stored as the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 0151A corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (S0236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of S0236, the first special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage unit is updated. In 0151A, the pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward by one entry ( S0237). Further, in the processing of S0237, the game control counter setting unit 0154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter. At this time, the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (S0238).

After performing either of the processing of S0234 and S0238, as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “miss”, FIG. Similar to the process of S0402 shown in (A), the special figure display result determination table data is selected (S0239). That is, in the process of S0402, the first special figure display result determination table 0130A or the second special figure display result determination table 0130B is set in the use table in accordance with the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of S0239, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 0130A is set in the use table, and if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2". The second special figure display result determination table 0130B may be set in the use table. Then, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss". By comparing with the value, it is determined which of the "big hit", the "small hit" and the "miss" is given to the special figure display result (S0240).

After the special figure display result is determined in S0240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" (S0241). Then, if it is determined that the "big hit" (S0241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 0152 is set to the ON state (S0242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 0131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (S0243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 0131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determining random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to "indeterminate change", "probable change", or "probability". Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type matches, one of the plurality of jackpot types is determined (S0244).

In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 0155 (S0245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is "non-probable change", the big hit type buffer value may be "0", if it is "probable change", it may be "1", and if it is "probable", it may be "2".

When it is determined in S0241 that it is not a "big hit" (S0241; NO), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (S0246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (S0246; YES), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 0152 is set to the on state (S0247).

If it is determined in S0246 that it is not a "small hit" (S0246; NO), after executing any of the processes of S0245 and S0247, whether to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state in advance The determination result, further, corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, set the confirmed special symbol (S0248).

After setting the confirmed special symbol in S0248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S0249), and the special symbol normal process is ended. In S0235, if the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" (S0235; YES), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (S0250), the special symbol normal processing is ended. To do. In this demonstration display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 05 is controlled from the main board 011. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to the board 012. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

In the fluctuation pattern setting process of S0111, the CPU 0103 selects the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination and the fluctuation pattern determination disturbance from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 0104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 0154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted.

As described above, when there is a judgment value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same fluctuation category in any of the fluctuation category determination tables corresponding to the number of pending storages, the judgment corresponding to the same fluctuation category. When the random number MR3 that matches the value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of reserved memories is greatly different between when the winning random number determination process (S0220) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (S0111) is executed. Also, in the variation pattern setting process, the same variation category as in the winning random number determination process is determined. For example, in the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is “99”, the winning number is retained regardless of the number of reserved memories. The fluctuation category “PA5” is determined by both the hourly random number determination processing and the fluctuation pattern setting processing. If the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined by the random number determination processing at the time of winning and the variation pattern setting processing regardless of the number of stored memories. To be done. In the process of S0261, it is preferable to determine the variation category by using the variation category determination random value MR3 stored as the pending data, but the CPU 0103 newly extracts the variation category determination random value MR3. Then, the variation category may be determined using the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category.

Subsequently, the CPU 0103 uses the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category to determine the variation category, as in S0412. That is, as shown in FIG. 38, the variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 39 based on the special figure display result and the number of pending storages, and the selected variation category determination table is selected. And the variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category. Subsequently, the CPU 0103 selects one of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 0101 based on the variation category as the determination result, which variation pattern determination table to set as the use table. Subsequently, the CPU 0103 determines one of the plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the usage table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern described above. decide.

FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 0101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables according to variation categories. FIG. 41(A) is an example of setting the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 41B is an example of setting the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (miss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 41C is an example of setting the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 41(D) to 41(H).

As described above, in the main board 011 in the start winning determination process of S0101, the transmission setting for transmitting the start mouth winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 012 (S0219). ), S0403, S0404, S0409, etc., the transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the special figure display result determined (S0405, S0407, S0410), according to the variation category determined in S0412 The transmission setting for transmitting the variable category command (S0413) is performed, and the transmission setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command is performed (S0221).

After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of S017 shown in FIG. 33, the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). When the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, a start mouth winning designation command (first start mouth winning designation command or second start mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command Four commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set.

Further, in the main board 011 in the special symbol normal process of S0110, the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is obtained by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like. In the variation pattern setting process of S0111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern setting process of S0111, the variable display result notification command for designating the fixed special symbol determined as described above, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined as described above, and the like are produced. Transmission settings for transmission to the control board 012 are performed. When variable display is started by executing the command control process of S017 shown in FIG. 33 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designation command, etc. are set within one timer interrupt. It is sent in a batch. Note that the commands are not limited to being collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control processing of S017 for each timer interrupt.

That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display process (variable display result of the special symbol) in the special symbol normal process (S0110) is set as "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit game state. Whether or not to control to the small hitting gaming state is performed, and a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting process (S0111), and each effect control command The content determined by is transmitted to the effect control board 012. In addition, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a "big hit" or a "small hit" is made by the random number determination process at the time of winning (S0220). As a "hit", it is determined whether or not it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state, a rough variable display mode (variation category) of a decorative design, etc. is determined, and determined by each effect control command. The content is transmitted to the production control board 012.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 012 will be described. In the effect control board 012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 0120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 42 is started, the effect control CPU 0120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S071) to clear the RAM 0122, set various initial values, and mount on the effect control board 012. The CTC (counter/timer circuit) registers are set. After that, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (S072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S072; NO), the process of S072 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

In addition, on the side of the effect control board 012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 0120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 0120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, control that becomes a production control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 011 via the relay board 015 among the input ports included in the I/O 0125. Capture the signal.

The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 0194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 0120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in S072 (S072; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (S073), and the command analysis process is executed (S074). In the command analysis processing executed in S074, for example, after the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 0100 of the main board 011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, the read operation is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the production control command are performed.

After executing the command analysis process in S074, the effect control process process is executed (S075). In the production control process processing of S075, various production devices such as a production image display operation in the display area of the image display device 05, a voice output operation from the speaker 08, a light emission operation in the lamp 09, and a drive operation in the production model are performed. With respect to the control contents of the effect operation used, judgment, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 011.

Following the effect control process processing of S075, effect random number updating processing is executed (S076), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 0193 are shown as various random number values used for effect control. Numerical data is updated by software. Then, the process returns to S072. The various random number values updated in S076 and used for effect control include various random number values such as MR6 to MR12 as well as random number values for determining a definite symbol described later.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S074 of FIG. 42 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 0120 first confirms the stored content of the effect control command reception buffer, and the like, so that the received command from the main board 011 transmitted via the relay board 015 is received. It is determined whether there is any (S0501). At this time, if there is no received command (S0501; NO), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in S0501 (YES in S0501), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start mouth winning designation command (S0502). . Then, when the command is the first start mouth winning award designation command (S0502; YES), the first waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S0503). For example, in the process of S0503, if a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first reserved storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 0192. Good.

If the received command is not the first start mouth prize designation command in S0502 (S0502; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the second start mouth prize designation command (S0504). Then, when the command is the second starting opening winning award designation command (S0504; YES), the second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S0505). For example, in the processing of S0505, the command reception control timer may be set to a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the second storage count notification command.

If the received command is not the second start mouth winning designation command in S0504 (S0504; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (S0506). When the received command is not the symbol designating command in S0506 (S0506; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the variation category command (S0507). When the received command is not the variable category command in S0507 (S0507; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (S0508). If it is the first reserved storage number notification command (S0508; YES), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (S0509).

When the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in S0508 (S0508; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (S0510). Then, when the command is the second reserved storage number notification command (S0510; YES), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (S0511).

If the received command is a symbol designating command in S0506 (S0506; YES), if the received command is a variable category command in S0507 (S0507; YES), or execute any of the processes of S0503, S0505, S0509, S0511. After that, in the process of S0503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, if the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set, the received command is received in the first start winning award received command buffer 0194A. After storing at the beginning of the empty area in (S0512), the process returns to S0501.

Further, if the received command is a symbol designating command in S0506 (S0506; YES), if the received command is a variable category command in S0507 (S0507; YES), or any of the processing of S0503, S0505, S0509, S0511. After executing, if the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of S0503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is set to the second start winning award received command. After storing at the head of the empty area in the buffer 0194B (S0512), the process returns to S0501.

When the first reserved storage number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved storage number notification command does not have to be stored in the first start winning award reception command buffer 0194A. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the vacant area in the first start winning time reception command buffer 0194A.

Further, when the second reserved storage number notification command is received together with the second fluctuation start command, the reserved storage number notification command may not be stored in the second start prize winning time reception command buffer 0194B. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning command reception command buffer 0194B.

If the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in S0510 (S0510; NO), it is determined whether the received command is an error designation command (S0513). If the received command is an error designation command (S0513; YES), error designation command processing is executed (S0514). In the error designation command processing, the received error designation command is stored in the error designation command buffer that stores the error designation command provided in the effect control data holding area 0190 described in FIG. 32, for example. The error command stored in the error designation command buffer can specify the type of error that has occurred by analyzing the EXT data. The effect control CPU 0120 may perform error notification according to the type of error. In the present embodiment, in the processing of S0514, the control data according to the type of error is stored in the layer 5 of the control data area, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, and the lighting control of the lamp 09 is performed. After executing the processing of S0514, the processing returns to S0501.

On the other hand, when the received command is not the error designation command (S0513; NO ), the setting corresponding to the other received commands is performed (S0515), and the process returns to S0501. For example, when the received command is a game state designation command, the game state designation command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Further, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether or not it is a time saving.

Starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command or second starting mouth winning designation command), symbol designating command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number Like the notification command), the effect control command received from the main board 011 when the start winning is generated is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved storage number notification command, the second reserved storage number notification command, the first starting mouth winning designation command, and the second starting mouth winning designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designating command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

When the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning prize received command buffer 0194A, whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a first reserved memory number notification command The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of an empty area in the corresponding storage area.

In addition, when the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 0194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a second reserved storage number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of an empty area in the corresponding storage area.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S075 of FIG. 42 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 0120 first executes a prize time effect determination process (S0150). FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S0150 of FIG. 44 as the winning effect determination process.

In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 0120 first stores the stored content in the start winning command buffer (first starting winning command buffer 0194A or second winning command buffer 0194B). It is checked (S0151), and it is determined whether or not the first start mouth winning designation command is received as a new received command (S0152). When it is determined in S0152 that the first start winning combination designation command is not received (S0152; NO), the stored contents in the second start winning combination reception command buffer 0194B are checked (S0153), and a new received command It determines whether it is receiving the second start hole winning designation command (S015 4). When it is determined in S0154 that the second start mouth winning award designation command is not received (S0154; NO), the winning effect determination process is ended.

When it is determined in S0152 that the first start-up winning combination designation command is received (S0152; YES), when it is specified in the processing of S0513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 43 that it is not time saving (S0155). : NO), the first hold effect determination process is executed (S0160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode during addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first start winning prize memory display area 05HL.

After executing the first hold effect determination process (S0160), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (S0161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 0120 changes the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start winning prize reception command buffer 0194A corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first holding effect determination processing is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetching announcement buffer 0194C.

After executing the processing of S0161, the effect control CPU 0120, the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (S0160) (the first start winning award buffer in the first start winning award reception command buffer 0194A. Based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 0194C corresponding to the number), a new hold display is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 05HL. The process is executed (S0162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 0120 causes the first start winning award storage display area 05HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 0194C described above. By setting the control pattern as the usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 0123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination processing is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 05HL. Then, the winning effect determination process is ended.

If it is determined in S0154 that the second start winning combination designation command has been received (S0154; YES), and if it is specified in the processing of S0513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 43 that the time is shortened (S0156: YES). ), the second hold effect determination process is executed (S0163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining the display mode of the hold display (also referred to as the display mode at the time of addition) when the additional display is performed in the second starting prize winning memory display area 05HR.

The respective processes of S0163, S0164, and S0165 related to the second starting mouth winning are the same as the processes of S0160, S0161, and S0162 related to the first starting mouth winning, and the “first Can be read as “second” and the code can be read corresponding to the reading, and thus the description is omitted.

When it is determined in S0152 that the first start mouth winning award designation command is received (S0152; YES), when it is specified in the process of S0513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 43 that it is time saving (S0155: YES), The effect control CPU 0120, the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 05HL, the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the storage contents in the first start winning a prize reception command buffer 0194A. In association with, the first hold display is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 05HL (S0166). Then, the winning effect determination process is ended.

When it is determined in S0154 that the second start mouth winning award designation command is received (S0154; YES), it is specified in the process of S0513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 43 that it is not time saving (S0156: NO). ), the production control CPU 0120 determines the normal display (white ball) as the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning award memory display area 05HR, and in the second start winning award reception command buffer 0194B. The second hold display in the normal display (white ball) display mode is added to the second start winning memory display area 05HR in association with the same buffer number as the stored content (S0166). Then, the winning effect determination process is ended.

After executing the winning effect determination process of S0150 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 0191 or the like, the following S0170 to 177 Select and execute one of the processes.

The variable display start waiting process of S0170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is performed based on whether the first variation start command (or second variation start command), variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the display device 05. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process of S0171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 04A and the second special symbol display device 04B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 05. Process to determine the fixed decorative symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result to perform variable display and other various staging operations, and active by shifting the first hold display or the second hold display A process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effect modes of various effects (for example, active display which is a main notice effect. This includes a change effect, a process for determining an effect mode of the active display change effect, and the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in S0172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 0120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 0192 based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Then, various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of decorative pattern during variable display of decorative pattern) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 0120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 05 for display on the screen based on the read control data, and outputs an effect sound signal to the voice control board 013. Then, various effect controls such as control for outputting effect sound from the speaker 08 and control for outputting an illumination signal to the lamp control board 014 to turn on/off/blink the lamp 09 are executed.

After performing such effect control, for example, in response to the fact that an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 011 is received. , The fixed decorative design as the final stopped design resulting in the variable display of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, The variable display result can be confirmed by autonomously deriving and displaying the finalized decorative design on the side of the production control board 012 without depending on the production control command from the main board 011. When the fixed decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure winning waiting process of S0173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 0120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 011 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit mid effect processing. To update. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Is updated to "4". When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The effect process during small hit in S0174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 0120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and changes in S0172. Similar to the display effect process during display, various effect controls in the small hitting game state are executed by outputting a video signal, effect sound signal, electric decoration signal, or the like. In addition, in the small hitting production effect process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 011. ..

The small hit completion production process of S0175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 0120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, etc., and reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and changes in S0172. Similar to the in-display effect process, various effect controls at the end of the small hitting game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, or the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

The big hit mid-game production process of S0176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 0120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and variably displays in S0172. Similar to the effect process, by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric signal, etc., various effect controls in the jackpot gaming state are executed. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to the reception of the hit end designation command from the main board 011.

The ending effect process of S0177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 0120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and the variable display effect in S0172. Similar to the process, by outputting a video signal, a production sound signal, an illumination signal, etc., various production controls at the end of the big hit game state are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S0171 of FIG. 44 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 0120 first reads the special figure display result as “miss” by reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 011 or the like. It is determined whether or not (S0522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “missing” (S0522; YES), the specified variation pattern is determined by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 011 or the like. It is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, "PA1-1" "PA2-1" "PA2-2" "PA2-3" in FIG. 27) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach". It is determined whether or not (S0523).

When it is determined in S0523 that it is a non-reach variation pattern (S0523; YES), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which are the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination is determined (S0524). As an example, in the process of S0524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left confirmed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 0193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 0121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left fixed design determination table, the left fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 05L in the display area of the image display device 05 is determined among the fixed decorative designs.

Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for the right fixed symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 0193 is extracted, and the predetermined right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 0121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the right fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 05R in the display area of the image display device 05 among the fixed decorative patterns is determined. At this time, the design number of the right fixed decorative design may be determined to be different from the design number of the left fixed decorative design by the setting in the right fixed design determination table and the like. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-decision symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 0193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 0121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the middle fixed decorative design which is stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 05C in the display area of the image display device 05 among the fixed decorative designs is determined. In the process of S0524, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination that is the predetermined chance eye symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol announcement is being executed.

When it is determined in S0523 that it is not the non-reach variation pattern (S0523; NO), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which is the final stop symbol forming the reach combination is determined (S0525). As an example, in the process of S0525, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left and right fixed symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 0193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 0121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left/right confirmed symbol determination table, etc., the symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 05L and 05R in the display area of the image display device 05 among the confirmed decorative symbols Decide the decorative pattern with the same number. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for medium-decision symbol determination, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 0193, is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 0121 or the like is displayed. By referring to the determined decorative design, the middle fixed decorative design that is stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 05C in the display area of the image display device 05 is determined.

Here, in the case where the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, as in the case where the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value is set. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design, the fixed decorative design may be a reach combination instead of a big hit combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, a difference (design difference) between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design is determined, and the medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the determined difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in S0522 that the special figure display result is not "miss" (S0522; NO), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or the special figure display result is "big hit". It is determined whether it is a “small hit” or other cases (S0526). When it is determined to be a "probability" or a "small hit" (S0526; YES), for example, a final decorative design that is the final stop design corresponding to the "probable" or "small hit" such as the opening chance. The combination is determined (S0527). In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for chance chance determination, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 0193, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 0121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the combination of the fixed decorative symbols forming any of the opening chances may be determined.

When it is determined in S0526 that it is an "non-probable change" or a "probable change" other than "probability" or "small hit" (S0526; NO), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop design constituting the big hit combination is determined. Yes (S0528). As an example, in the process of S0528, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 0193 is extracted, and subsequently, a predetermined value stored in the ROM 0121 or the like in advance. By referring to the jackpot determination symbol determination table, etc., the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 05L, 05C, 05R on the screen of the image display device 05 Decide the decorative pattern with the same number. At this time, a different decorative design may be determined as a fixed decorative design depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, presence/absence of promotion effect during the big hit, or the like.

As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, one of the plurality of types of normal symbols is selected to be determined as a fixed decorative symbol that constitutes the non-probable variation jackpot combination. Good. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variation", any one of the decorative patterns is selected from a plurality of types of regular symbols or probabilistic variation symbols, and a definite variation jackpot combination or a definite variation jackpot combination is formed. You can decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a fixed decorative design of a non-probable variation big hit combination, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during variable display is not given, and it is executed corresponding to the big jackpot game state. It is only necessary to be informed that the control is performed in the probable state by means of promotion performance during a big hit. On the other hand, when the confirmed decorative pattern of the probability variation big hit combination is determined, in the re-lottery effect during variable display, or without executing the re-lottery effect, a notification that the probability variation state is controlled is given.

When it is specified in the process of S0513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 43 that the time is not shortened (S0155: NO), after executing any of the processes of S0524, S0525, S0527, and S0528, the hold digestion process is executed. Yes (S0531). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, the special image including the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the first special drawing game (when the variable display of the decorative design this time is linked to the first special drawing game), the first start winning prize memory display area The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 05HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (the special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning a prize memory display area 05HL. Is displayed). More specifically, the effect control CPU 0120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning prize memory display area 05HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 0123. The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 05HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same applies when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

Further, in the processing of S0531, if there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be exhausted in the first start winning prize memory display area 05HL, the effect control CPU 0120 first starts the other hold display. If there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 05HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 05HR.

After executing the processing of S0531, effect execution setting processing is executed (S0532). In the effect execution setting process (S0532), a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, a process of determining the type of the active display change effect at the time of execution, and the process are executed. Process for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect at the time, process for determining the execution timing of the active display change effect at the time of execution, and setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on these process results It includes processing to do.

Further, the setting of the effect control pattern may include the setting of control data in the control data area described later. That is, in setting the effect control pattern, the control data for controlling the light emitting operation of the light emitting unit may be set in the control data area of a predetermined layer.

After the processing of S0532 is executed, execution setting of other variable display is performed (S0533). As an example, in the process of S0533, the execution setting of “one-shot notification effect” may be performed to immediately notify (deterministically notify) that the variable display result is “big hit” due to the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission. .. An example of the big hit notification sound is an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, or the like. One example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp that constitutes the light emitting member 09CC. Further, in the process of S0533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", for example, the effect of a predetermined mode may be set for lively play. For example, the effect may be set so that a predetermined lamp 09 (for example, the light emitting members 09SL and 09SR) emits light.

After the process of S0533 is executed, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 0192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example (S0534). Subsequently, the variable display start setting process for setting the change of the decorative pattern in the image display device 05 is executed (S0535). For example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process of S0532, to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 0123, or the like. The sound output from the speaker 08 is set by transmitting the setting sound for starting the change of the decorative pattern on the screen of 05 and transmitting the effect sound signal designated by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 013. Settings for starting light emission of the lamp 09 are performed by, for example, setting for starting and transmitting an illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 014.

After executing the processing of S0535, the commands stored in the first start-winning-time receive command buffer 0194A or the second start-winning-winning reception command buffer 0194B are consumed (S0536). Specifically, the effect control CPU 0120 has the smallest command among the commands associated with the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 0194A when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the first start mouth prize designation command The command associated with is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning time reception command buffer. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command is won. Shift while maintaining the order.

Further, in the process of S0536, the information stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 0194C or the second prefetching notice buffer 0194D provided in the RAM 0122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S0537), and then the variable display start setting processing ends.

The effect control CPU 0120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 011 and, when executing the active display change effect, changes the active display change effect. The production pattern of the production and the execution timing of the active display change production are set as the production control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 0120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command as an effect control pattern, and effects corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as a production control pattern. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command are prepared, one of them is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (S0532) ends.

Next, the control data area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47(A) is a diagram showing an example of a control data area in which priorities are set in correspondence with the gaming state. The control data area is an area for storing (storing) control data for controlling the light emission of the lamp 09. The effect control CPU 0120 appropriately stores the control data in the control data area according to the effect mode, and appropriately executes the stored control data.

In FIG. 47A, it is assumed that priority can be set in the control data area. FIG. 47A illustrates a case where five priorities are set in the control data area. Specifically, five layers of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 are set in order from the lowest priority. Here, the numbers (1 to 5) attached to the layers are layer numbers (layer numbers). That is, when the layer number is small, the priority is low, and when the layer number is high, the priority is high.
The priority order of the control data area in the present embodiment is the execution priority order of the control data executed when the lamp 09 is controlled to be turned on. The effect control CPU 0120 preferentially executes the control data set in the control data area of the predetermined priority over the control data set in the control data area of the priority lower than the predetermined priority. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 0120 executes the control data set in the control data area having a higher priority than the predetermined priority over the control data set in the control data area having the predetermined priority. To do. For example, when the control data is set in all of the five areas of layer 1 to layer 5, the control data set in the area of layer 5 is preferentially executed. Further, for example, when the control data is set in the three areas of layer 1, layer 2, and layer 4, the control data set in the area of layer 4 is preferentially executed. Further, for example, when the control data is set in two areas of layer 2 and layer 3, the control data set in the area of layer 3 and the like. When the control data is set only in the area of one layer, the control data set in the area of the one layer is executed.

Here, when the effect control CPU 0120 preferentially executes the control data, only the control data in the control data area having the priority may be executed. For example, when the control data area of the control data for executing the lamp effect according to the effect A has a higher priority than the control data area of the control data for executing the lamp effect according to the effect B, the effect control CPU 0120, Only the lamp effect related to effect A may be executed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 0120 preferentially executes the control data, the control data in the control data area to be prioritized should be executed more easily than the control data in the control data area to be prioritized. May be. For example, when the control data area of the control data for executing the lamp effect according to the effect A has a higher priority than the control data area of the control data for executing the lamp effect according to the effect B, the effect control CPU 0120, In order that the lamp effect according to the effect A is easier to visually recognize than the lamp effect according to the effect B, the brightness of the lamp in the effect A is made higher than the brightness of the lamp in the effect B, or the lighting time of the lamp in the effect A is the lamp in the effect B. The lighting time may be set to be longer than the lighting time.

As described above, in the gaming machine 01, the effect control CPU 0120 controls data set in a plurality of control data areas (for example, areas of layer 1 to layer 5 shown in FIG. 47A) ( For example, in the data for executing the lighting control of the lamp 09, etc.), the higher the layer number assigned to the layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 47A, the higher the layer number. The control data set in the control data area having the highest priority (for example, when the control data is set in all five areas of layers 1 to 5), the control data is set in the layer 5 area. The control data set, or, for example, the control data set in the area of layer 4 when the control data is set in the three areas of layer 1, layer 2, and layer 4, or, for example, the layer 2, when the control data is set in the two areas of layer 3, the control data set in the area of layer 3. The control data is set in only one layer area. In this case, the light emission of the light emitting unit is controlled based on the control data set in the area of the one layer.

Further, the gaming machine 01 is a gaming machine that displays a variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (a big-hit gaming state, etc.), and stores the variable display which has not been started yet as a pending storage. Hold storage means (first special figure hold storage section 0151A, second special figure hold storage section 0151B, first start winning award reception command buffer 0194A, second start winning award reception command buffer 0194B, etc.) The holding display means (image display device 05, RAM 0102, first start prize winning memory display area 05HL, second start winning prize memory display area 05HR, etc.) capable of displaying the hold memory as a hold display (holding display etc.) During execution, a fluctuation correspondence display means (production control CPU 0120, S0532, etc. in FIG. 46) capable of performing fluctuation correspondence display (active display, etc.) corresponding to the fluctuation display, and a fluctuation display of the target pending storage. 43. The pending display mode change (change during pending display in FIG. 43) that changes the mode of the pending display before the execution of the, and the variation corresponding display mode change that changes the mode of the variation corresponding display during execution of the variable display (FIG. 44), and at least one of the plurality of timings in the pending display period corresponding to the target pending storage and the variable display period is executed. Display mode changing means (CPU 0120 for effect control, S0532 in FIG. 46, icon effect setting process in FIG. 45, S0172 in FIG. 44, etc.) and a light emitting unit (for example, light emitting members 09CC and 09CL shown in FIG. 23). , 09CR, 09U, 09SL, 09SR, etc.).

According to such a configuration, with respect to the pending display mode change and the change-corresponding display mode change, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display of the change target and the timing of the display mode change, and to change the pending display mode. Amusement of the game can be improved by correspondingly changing the light emission of the light emitting unit.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53, the case where the effect control CPU 0120 executes only control data in the control data area having priority is exemplified. For example, the effect control CPU 0120, while executing the control data of the control data area of a predetermined priority order, controls the control data area of a priority order lower than the priority order of the control data area being executed. An example of not executing data will be described. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 0120 sets a control data area having a higher priority than the priority of the control data area being executed when the control data in the control data area having a predetermined priority is being executed. Occasionally, a case will be exemplified in which the execution of the control data that is being executed is interrupted or stopped, and the control data in the control data area having the set higher priority is executed.

In the present embodiment, the case where the control data area is set in five layers classified into a maximum of five priorities is illustrated, but the number of priority classifications is not limited to five. The number of priority classifications may be, for example, 2-4, 6 or more. Further, the number of classifications of priority is illustrated as a fixed value of 5 regardless of the game state described later, but the number of classifications of priority may vary depending on the game state and the like.

In FIG. 47A, the control data area is illustrated as being set in a different priority order depending on the state of the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, as a game state, a low base state, a high base state, and a big hit state (in the present embodiment, the "big hit game state" may be abbreviated as "big hit state"). As an example, the priority order (layer) of the control data area in each gaming state is illustrated. For example, when the game state is a low base state, "BGM (normal fluctuation, reach)" is set for layer 1, "notice B" is set for layer 2, "notice A" is set for layer 3, "confirmation notification" is set for layer 4, and The case where the control data of "error" is set in the layer 5 is illustrated. In addition, when the gaming state is a high base state, "BGM (normal variation)" is set for layer 1, "BGM (reach variation)" is set for layer 2, "advance notice (all)" is set for layer 3, and "confirmation notification" is set for layer 4. And the case where "error" control data is set in the layer 5 is illustrated. Also, when the gaming state is a big hit state, “BGM (big hit)” is set on layer 1, “advance notice (suspended, promotion)” on layer 2, “big winning prize” on layer 3, “probable variation winning” on layer 4, And the case where "error" control data is set in the layer 5 is illustrated. The control data set in the control data area of FIG. 47(A) indicates the contents of each effect. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state, it is illustrated that the control data for performing the lighting control of the lamp 09 corresponding to the effect of “BGM (normal fluctuation, reach)” is set in the layer 1. The effect control CPU 0120 performs lighting control of the frame LED 28 and the like according to the effect of BGM (normal fluctuation, reach) based on the control data set in the control data area of the layer 1.

The control data area set in each layer in each gaming state illustrated in FIG. 47A is not limited to this. For example, when the gaming state is a low base state, instead of setting "notice B" (a control data area for producing the notice B) in Layer 2, notice B or notice C (produce the notice C is given. It is also possible to set the control data area of “notice B, C” in which any of the control data areas) is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the gaming state for setting the control data area, three gaming states of the low base state, the high base state, and the big hit state are exemplified, but the gaming state is not limited to this. For example, the control data areas may be classified according to whether the gaming state is a low-probability state or a high-probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a game state described later, a case where five priority levels are set for each of the three game states of a low base state, a high base state, and a big hit state is exemplified, but the number and number of priority levels are set. The fixed/variable setting may be set in each gaming state.

The lighting effect of the lamp 09 based on the control data set in the control data area is the sound effect output from the speaker 08 based on the voice control data and the display effect displayed on the image display device 05 based on the display control data. Correspondence can be performed. For example, in the case where the lighting effect is performed corresponding to the sound effect, when the sound effect based on the voice control data is changed, the control data is changed and the lighting effect such as the lighting pattern of the lamp is changed. Good.

In addition, in error notification that outputs an error sound or error display that is executed based on an error designation command, the lamp responds to the change of voice control data for outputting the error sound or display control data for outputting the error display. The lighting pattern of 09 may be changed.

The sound effect may include a silent effect, the display effect may include a non-display effect, and the lighting effect may include a non-lighting effect.

The control data is not limited to the case of being associated with the voice control data or the display control data, and may be set not corresponding to the voice control data or the display control data. For example, when the player operates the operation unit such as the push button 031B while executing the sound effect related to the BGM effect, the control data may be changed corresponding to the operation of the operation unit.

In addition, FIG. 47A illustrates the case where one control data area is set in all priority layers, but two or more control data areas are set in the same priority layer. Good. For example, when the gaming state is a high base state, a plurality of control data areas for effect related to the announcement may be set in layer 3 having the same priority. In addition, each control data area set in each layer is set at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the number of control data areas set at the same time is arbitrary.

The case where the control data set in the control data area described above is the actual data for controlling the light emission of the lamp 09 is illustrated. However, the control data set in the control data area may be an address or the like indirectly indicating the recording destination where the actual data is recorded. For example, the effect control CPU 0120 may execute the actual data recorded in the recording destination indicated by the address set in the control data area.

As a general rule, the settings in the control data area shown in FIG. 47A are reset (erased) every time one variation ends. By resetting the control data area each time the fluctuation ends, it is possible to prevent unnecessary control data from remaining in the control data area. The setting of the control data of the lighting effect corresponding to the effect exceptionally performed over a plurality of fluctuations may not be reset by the end of the fluctuation.

Next, each effect shown in FIG. 47A will be described. It is assumed that the lamp control in this embodiment corresponds to the sound effect in each effect shown in FIG. 47(A). In the following description, it is assumed that the lamp 09 that emits light in each effect is controlled to light one or more lamps based on the control data. For example, in the finalization notification effect, the light emitting member 09U may emit light and other lamps such as the light emitting member 09CC may also emit light.

In FIG. 47(A), "error" is control data for executing error notification in all game states. The "error" control data is set in the control data area of layer 5, which has the highest priority. The error notification is performed by displaying an error image in the display area of the image display device 05 in response to the error designation command transmitted from the main board 011 and outputting an error sound from the speaker 08, and further turning on the lamp 09 with an error light. This is an effect (error effect) for notifying an error. When the layer 5 error control data is set, the effect control CPU 0120 gives priority to other lighting effects and performs error lighting.

The “confirmation notification” is control data set in the control data area of the priority of layer 4 for executing the confirmation notification effect in the low base state and the high base state. The confirmation notifying effect is, for example, an effect of notifying that the big hit has been confirmed. In the confirmation notification effect, an effect in which a V-shaped lamp or a lamp in which a V-shape is drawn blinks or a V-shaped symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 05 may be executed.

The "probability variation winning a prize" is the control data set in the control data area of the priority of layer 4 for executing the probability variation winning effect in the big hit state. Here, it is assumed that there are two types of effects in the probability variation winning effect. One is an effect that is performed when a prize is won in a predetermined winning opening in a gaming machine in which decorative patterns are aligned and then a big prize is won when a prize is won in a predetermined winning opening in an accessory. The other is, for example, whether or not there is a winning of the special variable winning ball device 07 (or a predetermined area (large winning hole) provided in the special variable winning ball device 07. Hereinafter referred to as a special variable winning ball device 07 etc.). This is an effect that is performed when a special variable winning ball device 07 or the like is won in a gaming machine in which the type of jackpot is determined. When the special variable winning ball device 07 or the like is won, the type of big hit may be a probability variation big hit, and when the special variable winning ball device 07 or the like is not won, the type of big hit may be the normal big hit. In the probability variation winning effect in the present embodiment, for example, the predetermined area is provided in the special variable winning ball device 07, and a predetermined light emitting member emits light when a prize is won in the predetermined area.

“Announcement A” is control data set in the control data area of the priority order of layer 3 for executing the notice A effect in the low base state. Further, the “preliminary notice B” is the control data set in the control data area of the priority of layer 2 for executing the notice B effect in the low base state. In the present embodiment, in each of the notice A effect and the notice B effect, the light emitting members 09CC, 09CR, and 09CL emit light, and images corresponding to the notice A effect and the notice B effect are displayed on the image display device 05. Shall be. For example, in the notice A effect, the image of the character A is displayed. Further, in the notice B effect, the image of the character B may be displayed.

"Notice (all)" is control data set in the control data area of the priority order of layer 3 for executing all the notice effects including the notice A effect and the notice B effect in the high base state. In the low base state, the notice A effect is set in the layer 3 priority control data area, and the notice B effect is set in the layer 2 priority control data area, while in the high base state In, all the notice effects are set in the control data area having the same priority. It should be noted that the lighting control in the case where the control data of the plurality of notice effects are set in the same priority will be described later with reference to FIG.

The "big winning prize" is control data set in the control data area of the priority of layer 3 for executing the special winning effect in the big hit state. The special winning opening winning effect is, for example, an effect performed when a winning ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 07. In the special winning opening winning effect in the present embodiment, the lamp 09 emits light each time a winning ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 07. In addition, in the special winning opening winning effect, when a so-called over-winning occurs, a specific effect may be executed.

"Preliminary notice (holding series, promotion)" is the control data set in the control data area of the priority of layer 2 for executing the notice (holding series) effect or the notice (promotion) effect in the big hit state. Is.

In the notice (holding series), "holding series (also referred to as holding-in-place series chan)" means a holding storage that is consumed after the end of the big hit (a holding storage stored before being controlled to the big hit state, or It is a big hit based on the pending storage stored when the big hit state is controlled. In addition to the above, the pending storage that is consumed in the variable display within a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit (the holding storage newly stored after the first variable display after the end of the big hit state is performed. It may also be a big hit based on (may be), it may be referred to as a holding series. In addition, the above-described predetermined number of times may be the same number (e.g., 8 times) as the maximum number that can be held (total number of held storages. 8). The notice (holding series) effect is an effect that, when there is a holding memory that is a holding series (a holding memory that is a big hit), a notice that the holding series will be held is given. The start timing of the notice (holding series) effect may be at least a timing before the player can recognize that the holding series will be held (before the effect pattern that becomes the big hit symbol stops). For example, when the pending memory stored before being controlled to the big hit state is a pending memory that is a pending series, a notice (pending series) effect is displayed during display of a fanfare screen, a round game, or an ending screen. May start. Also, when the pending storage stored when the jackpot state is controlled is a pending storage that is a pending run, during a round game (during a round game after the pending storage that is a pending run is stored) or ending. The notice (holding series) effect may be started while the screen is displayed. Further, when the newly stored pending storage after the first big display after the end of the big hit state is the pending storage that is the pending storage, a notice is given when the pending storage that is the pending storage is stored. (Holding series) You may start production.

"Promotion" in advance notice (promotion) means probabilistic jackpot (appears to be a regular jackpot lower than the probable jackpot when it becomes a probable jackpot, and later appears to be promoted to a jackpot jackpot) or a round. It is a number promotion (for example, when it becomes a 15 round jackpot, it looks like it became an 8 round jackpot lower than the 15 round jackpot, and later it seems to have been promoted to a 15 round jackpot) (probability change promotion, round Anything that includes at least one of the number promotion). The notice (promotion) effect is a promotion effect that notifies the promotion (probability variation promotion effect, round number promotion effect), or an effect that gives notice of execution of the promotion effect. The start timing of the advance notice (probability change promotion) effect may be any timing after the end of the big hit and before the start of the first variable display. For example, the notice (probability change promotion) effect may be started during the fanfare screen display, the round game display, the ending screen display, or the like. The start timing of the announcement (promotion of the number of rounds) may be any timing before the end of the final round before promotion (for example, the eighth round in the eight-round jackpot) ends. For example, the notice (promotion of the number of rounds) may be started during the display of the fanfare screen or during the round game (during the round game until the final round before promotion).

"BGM (normal fluctuation, reach fluctuation)" is for control set in the priority control data area of layer 1 that executes BGM (normal fluctuation) effect or BGM (reach fluctuation) effect in the low base state. The data. The BGM (normal fluctuation) effect is, for example, an effect executed when the fluctuation category is non-reach (miss) in PA2. Further, the BGM (reach variation) effect is an effect executed when the variation category is reach (normal reach or super reach) in PA3 to PA5 and PB3 to PB5, for example. In the low base, the BGM (normal change) effect and the BGM (reach change) effect are set in the layer 1 having the same priority.

On the other hand, "BGM (normal fluctuation)" in the high base is control data set in the priority control data area of layer 1, and the BGM (reach fluctuation) effect is for control of layer 2 priority. This is the control data set in the data area. By increasing the priority of the reach effect in the high base state over that of the reach effect in the low base state, it is possible to improve the interest.

Note that the priority order of the control data area for executing each effect set in the effect described with reference to FIG. 47A is set for the following reason.

Due to the nature of BGM, the priority of BGM production is set to the lowest in any game state.

In the low base state, the notice A effect has a higher priority than the notice B effect. This is because, for example, the notice A effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice B effect. Further, in the low base state, the confirmation notification effect has a higher priority than the notice A effect. This is because, for example, the confirmation notification effect is an effect indicating that the big hit is confirmed.
In the high base state, the BGM (reach) effect has a higher priority than the BGM (normal) effect. This is because, for example, the BGM (reach) effect is an effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the BGM (normal) effect.

In the high base state, the notice (all) effect has a higher priority than the BGM (reach) effect. This is because, for example, the notice (all) effect is an effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the BGM (reach) effect.
In the high base state, the confirmation notification effect has a higher priority than the notice (all) effect. This is because, for example, the confirmation notification effect is an effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than an announcement (all) effect.

In the big hit state, the announcement (holding series, promotion) effect has a higher priority than the BGM (big hit) effect. This is because, for example, a notice (suspended series, promotion) is a more important effect for the player than a BGM (big hit) effect.
In the big hit state, the big winning mouth winning effect has a higher priority than the notice (holding, promotion) effect. For example, the special winning opening winning presentation is performed every time a prize is won, and the notice (holding series, promotion) presentation is generally performed in the display area of the image display device 05 for a relatively longer time than the big winning opening winning presentation. In the case of production, if the priority of the big winning award winning production is set higher than the notice (suspended, promotion) production, any production can be announced to the player, but the notice (suspended, promotion) production This is because, when the priority is set to be higher than that of the special winning opening prize presentation, only the advance notice (holding series, promotion) presentation is performed, and the special winning opening prize presentation is not performed. Further, as described above, in the big winning mouth prize presentation, the production at the time of over-winning is generally performed, and since the over-winning is a profit that cannot be originally obtained for the player, the importance of the production is high. It is also because it is expensive.

By the way, the setting of the control data for each effect described above is reset when the time set for each effect has passed, except for the BGM effect and the control data for the effect that is performed over a plurality of games. For example, when the notice A effect is finished, the setting of the control data for the notice A effect is reset. In a general pachinko gaming machine, the effect is changed according to a predetermined condition, but when the effect is changed, the setting of the control data is reset. For example, in a gaming machine, an effect may be branched into two or more and executed. In the effect shown in FIG. 29B, an effect such as "extremely thick" that changes the display mode of the special image is executed by branching from an effect that does not change under a predetermined condition. Further, even in a confrontation effect in which characters are confronted with each other on the image display device 05, an effect to win and an effect to be defeated by a predetermined condition are branched and executed. When the effect is branched into a plurality of effects, the control data of the corresponding effect may be reset and reset when the effect is branched.
This is the end of the description of the control data area using FIG.

Next, a case where the priority order of the control data area is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing an example of the control data area in which the priority order is changed according to the game state.

47(B) shows the priority order of the control data area set in place of the priority order of the control data area in the high base state shown in FIG. 47(A). That is, the priority order of the control data area in the low base state shown in FIG. 47(A) is changed to the priority order of the control data area shown in FIG. 47(B) due to the high base state.
In FIG. 47(A), layer 3 is the notice A effect and layer 2 is the notice B effect, whereas in FIG. 47(B), the notice B effect is the priority order of layer 3 and the notice is given. The priority order is changed to the priority order of the effect A for layer 2. That is, the priority order of the effects of the layer 3 and the layer 2 is exchanged and reversed. For example, in the low base state, the notice A effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice B effect, and in the high base state, the notice B effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice A effect. This is the case when the performance is high.

In the present embodiment, the case where the priority order is changed by exchanging the priority orders of the effects of the two layers of the layer 2 and the layer 3 has been exemplified. However, for example, the priority order of the three layers of the layer 2 to the layer 4 is changed. It may be changed. Moreover, you may make it change the priority order only for the specific production|presentation contained in a predetermined layer. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the priority (layer) of the effect is changed depending on whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state is exemplified, but the priority order is changed in the case of another game state. Good. For example, the priority order of effects may be changed between the high base state and the big hit state. In addition, that the priority order is changed according to the game state may include the case where other conditions (for example, presence or absence of operation of the player with respect to the operation unit) are satisfied in addition to the friendship state.
The interest of the game can be improved by changing the priority order of the effect depending on the game state.
This is the end of the description of the case where the priority order of the control data area is changed according to the game state, using FIG. 47(B).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53, lamp control in a predetermined game state will be illustrated. Note that the lamp control shown in FIGS. 48 to 53 is performed when the effect control CPU 0120 sets control data in the control data area and executes lighting control of the lamp 09 based on the set control data. To illustrate. However, the control unit that sets the control data in the control data area and controls the lighting of the lamp 09 is not limited to the effect control CPU 0120, and may be executed by another control unit.

First, an example of the lamp control in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control in the low base state.
It is assumed that the layers 1 to 5 on the vertical axis shown in FIG. 48 can be set with control data for executing the lighting effect of the lamp 09 in the low base state in the gaming state shown in FIG. 47(A). The horizontal axis shown in FIG. 48 is the time axis. At the top of FIG. 48, the layer number of the control data that is actually turned on and displayed by the lamp 09 when the control data is set in the control data area of each layer is shown.

In FIG. 48, it is assumed that control data is not set in all layers before T01. When the control data is not set, the lamp 09 is controlled so that it is not lit.

At T01, when the lamp control data (BGM lamp control data) for performing the BGM effect of the layer 1 is set and is turned on, the control data is not set in the other layers, so the lamp 09 The lighting is controlled based on the layer 1 BGM lamp control data.

At T02, when the lamp control data (notice B lamp control data) for performing the notice B effect of the layer 2 is set and turned on, the lamp 09 has a higher priority than the layer 1 BGM lamp control data. The lighting is controlled based on the high notice B lamp control data.

At T03, when the effect based on the notice B lamp control data of layer 2 is completed, the control data area of layer 2 is reset and turned off, and the control data of the layer having a higher priority than layer 1 disappears. The lighting of the lamp 09 is controlled based on the layer 1 BGM lamp control data in the ON state again.

At T04, when the notice B lamp control data of layer 2 is set again and turned on, the lamp 09 is turned on again based on the notice B lamp control data having a higher priority than the BGM lamp control data of layer 1. To be done.

At T05, when the lamp control data (announcement A lamp control data) for performing the notice A effect of the layer 3 is set and turned on, the lamp 09 turns the BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 and the layer 2 of the layer 2. The lighting is controlled based on the advance notice A lamp control data having a higher priority than the advance notice B lamp control data.

At T06, the notice B lamp control data of the layer 2 is reset and turned off, and at T07, the notice B lamp control data of the layer 2 is set and turned on. However, since the notice A lamp control data of the layer 3 set in T05 is kept in the ON state, the lamp 09 is lit based on the notice B lamp control data of the layer 2 having a lower priority than the layer 3. Not done.

At T08, when the lamp control data (error lamp control data) for performing the error effect of the layer 5 is set and is turned on, the lamp 09 turns the BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 and the notice B of the layer 2 into advance. Lighting control is performed based on the lamp control data and the error lamp control data having a higher priority than the layer 3 advance notice A lamp control data.

Note that the notice B effect based on the notice B lamp control data of layer 2 is turned off at T03, T06, and T09 by the effect control process timer that controls the effect time of the notice B effect.

In addition, in FIG. 48, a case is illustrated in which the control data (determination notification lamp control data) for performing the confirmation notification effect of layer 4 is not set, but the confirmation notification lamp control data of layer 4 is set. In some cases, the lighting control is performed based on the fixed notification lamp control data in preference to the lamp control data of layers 1 to 3 having a lower priority than layer 4. Further, when the error lamp control data of the layer 5 having a higher priority than the layer 4 is set, the lighting control is performed based on the error lamp control data in preference to the confirmation notification lamp control data.
This is the end of the description of the example of the lamp control in the low base state, with reference to FIG.

Next, an example of the lamp control in the high base state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control in the high base state.
It is assumed that the layers 1 to 5 on the vertical axis shown in FIG. 49 can be set with control data for executing the lighting effect of the lamp 09 in the high base state in the gaming state shown in FIG. 47(A). The horizontal axis shown in FIG. 49 is the time axis. Similar to FIG. 48, the uppermost part of FIG. 49 shows the layer number of the control data that is actually turned on and displayed by the lamp 09 when the control data is set in the control data area of each layer.

In FIG. 49, control data is not set in all layers before T11. When the control data is not set, the lamp 09 is controlled so that it is not lit.

At T11, when the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 is set and turned on, the control data is not set in the other layers, so the lamp 09 becomes the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1. Lighting control is performed based on this.

At T12, when lamp control data (preliminary lamp control data) for performing the notice A or notice B of the layer 3 is set and turned on, the lamp 09 is used for the normal BGM lamp control of the layer 1. Lighting control is performed based on the notice lamp control data having a higher priority than the data.

Even if the lamp control data (reach BGM lamp control data) for performing the reach BGM effect of the layer 2 is set and turned on in T13, the notice lamp control data of the layer 3 is maintained in the on state. Therefore, the lighting of the lamp 09 is not controlled based on the reach BGM lamp control data of the layer 2 having a lower priority than the layer 3.

At T14, when the notice lamp control data of layer 3 is reset and turned off, the lamp 09 is in the on state, and the reach BGM lamp control data of layer 2 and the normal BGM lamp control data of layer 1 are included. The lighting control is performed based on the layer 2 reach BGM lamp control data having a high priority.

At T15, when the reach BGM lamp control data of the layer 2 is reset and turned off, the lamp 09 is lighting-controlled based on the layer 1 normal BGM lamp control data which is on.

At T16, when the lamp control data (determination notification lamp control data) for performing the confirmation notification effect of the layer 4 is set and turned on, the lamp 09 has a higher priority than the layer 1 normal BGM lamp control data. Lighting control is performed based on the confirmation notification lamp control data having a high value.

At T17, when the confirmation notification lamp control data of the layer 4 is reset and turned off, the lamp 09 is lighting-controlled based on the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 which is on.

The reach BGM lamp effect based on the reach BGM lamp control data of layer 2 is turned off at T15 by the effect control process timer that controls the effect time of the reach BGM lamp effect. Further, the notice lamp effect based on the notice lamp control data of the layer 3 is turned off at T14 by the effect control process timer which controls the effect time of the notice lamp effect.
This is the end of the description of the example of the lamp control in the high base state, with reference to FIG.

Next, an example of the lamp control in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control in the big hit state.

It is assumed that the layers 1 to 5 on the vertical axis shown in FIG. 50 can be set with control data for executing the lighting effect of the lamp 09 in the big hit state in the gaming state shown in FIG. 47(A). Further, the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 50 is a time axis. At the top of FIG. 50, as in FIG. 48, the layer number of the control data that is actually turned on and displayed by the lamp 09 when the control data is set in the control data area of each layer is shown.

In FIG. 50, it is assumed that the layer 1 BGM lamp control data is always on. Therefore, when the control data is not set in another layer, the lamp 09 is controlled to be lighted based on the BGM lamp control data of the layer 1.

At T21, when the lamp control data (prize count lamp control data) for performing the big winning opening prize count effect of the layer 3 is set and turned on, the lamp 09 turns the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 into effect. Lighting control is performed based on the winning count lamp control data having a higher priority.

The special winning opening winning count effect ends when a predetermined time counted by a timer has elapsed since the winning prize was counted. When the special winning opening winning count effect is finished and the winning count lamp control data is reset and turned off, the lamp 09 is controlled to be lit based on the layer 1 BGM lamp control data.

At T22, when the winning count lamp control data of layer 3 is set again and turned on, the lamp 09 is lighting-controlled based on the winning count lamp control data. When a predetermined time has passed after the prize balls have been counted, the special winning opening prize count effect has ended, and the prize count lamp control data has been reset and turned off, the lamp 09 is a layer 1 BGM lamp. Lighting control is performed based on the control data.

At T23, when the notice lamp control data of layer 2 is set and turned on, the lamp 09 is controlled to be lit based on the notice lamp control data of layer 2 having a higher priority than the BGM lamp control data of layer 1. It

At T24, when the winning count lamp control data of layer 3 is set again and turned on, the lamp 09 is lighting-controlled based on the winning count lamp control data. When a predetermined time has elapsed after the prize winning is counted, the special winning opening winning count effect is finished, and the winning count lamp control data is reset to the off state, the lamp 09 turns on the layer 2 in the on state. The lighting is controlled based on the warning lamp control data of.

At T25, similar to T24, when the winning count lamp control data of the layer 3 is set again and turned on, the lighting of the lamp 09 is controlled based on the winning count lamp control data. When a predetermined time has elapsed after the prize winning is counted, the special winning opening winning count effect is finished, and the winning count lamp control data is reset to the off state, the lamp 09 turns on the layer 2 in the on state. The lighting is controlled based on the warning lamp control data of.

At T26, when the notice lamp control data of the layer 2 is reset and turned off, the lamp 09 is controlled to be lit based on the BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 which is on.

At T27, when the lamp control data (confirmed prize lamp control data) for performing the confirmed winning effect of the layer 4 and the winning count lamp control data of the layer 3 are set and turned on, the lamp 09 turns the layer 1 The lighting control is performed on the basis of the fixed winning lamp control data of the layer 4, which has a higher priority than the BGM lamp control data and the winning count lamp control data of the layer 3. The winning count lamp control data is reset to an off state when the predetermined winning time has passed after the winning balls are counted and the special winning opening winning count effect is finished and reset.

At T28 and T29, even if the winning count lamp control data of layer 3 is set and turned on, the fixed winning lamp control data of layer 4 having a higher priority than layer 3 remains on. Therefore, the lighting of the lamp 09 is controlled based on the confirmed winning lamp control data of layer 4.

At T30, the confirmed winning lamp control data of layer 4 is reset and turned on at the end of the round. When the fixed winning lamp control data of layer 4 is turned off, the lamp 09 is lighting-controlled based on the BGM lamp control data of layer 1 which is on.

As described above, the winning count lamp control data of layer 3 shown in FIG. 50 is turned off at a predetermined time counted by the timer, whereas the confirmed winning lamp control data of layer 4 is: Turns off at the end of the round. That is, the control data area is a control data area in which control data for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit is set when the round ends (a control data area in which the probability variation winning lamp control data of layer 4 is set). ) And a control data area for setting control data for terminating the light emission of the light emitting section after a predetermined time has elapsed (control data area for setting the winning count lamp control data of layer 3) ) And.
With such a configuration, it is possible to set control data for executing a suitable lighting effect for each control data area.
This is the end of the description of the example of the lamp control in the big hit state, with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, an example of the lamp control relating to the control data area of the same layer will be described. FIG. 51 is a time chart showing an example of the lamp control relating to the control data area of the same layer.

It is assumed that the layers 1 and 3 on the vertical axis shown in FIG. 51 can be set with control data for executing the lighting effect of the lamp 09 in the high base state of the gaming state shown in FIG. 47(A). The horizontal axis shown in FIG. 51 is the time axis. Similar to FIG. 48, the uppermost part of FIG. 51 shows the layer number of the control data that is actually turned on and displayed by the lamp 09 when the control data is set in the control data area of each layer. In FIG. 51, the lamp in the case where the control data area in which the notice A lamp control data is set and the control data area in which the notice B lamp control data is set are set in the layer 3 having the same priority. The lighting control of 09 is illustrated.

In FIG. 51, it is assumed that control data is not set in all layers before T31. When the control data is not set, the lamp 09 is controlled so that it is not lit.

At T31, when the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 is set and turned on, the control data is not set in other layers, so the lamp 09 becomes the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1. Lighting control is performed based on this.

At T32, when the notice A lamp control data of the layer 3 is set and turned on, the lamp 09 is controlled to be lit based on the notice A lamp control data having a higher priority than the layer 1 normal BGM lamp control data. It

Further, at T32, when the notice A lamp control data of layer 3 is set and turned on, the priority flag is turned on. Here, the priority flag is for not exclusively setting the control data of other effects in the layers of the same priority when the priority flag is in the ON state.

When attempting to set the notice B lamp control data of layer 3 at T33, and the priority flag is in the off state, the notice B lamp control data is set at T33 to T55 as indicated by the broken line in FIG. It However, when the priority flag is ON, the notice B lamp control data cannot be set.

At T34, when the notice A lamp control data of layer 3 is reset and turned off, the lamp 09 is controlled to be turned on based on the normal BGM lamp control data of layer 1, which is on. That is, since the notice B lamp control data is not set at T33, even if the notice A lamp control data is reset and turned off, the lamp 09 is lighting-controlled based on the notice B lamp control data. There is no such thing. By exclusively performing the notice productions having the same priority, it is possible to prevent the notice productions having the same priority from being executed midway.
Above, description of an example of the lamp control which concerns on the control data area of the same layer using FIG. 51 is completed.

Next, an example of lamp control relating to the end of light emission will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control relating to the end of light emission.

It is assumed that the layers 1 and 3 on the vertical axis shown in FIG. 52 can be set with control data for executing the lighting effect of the lamp 09 in the high base state in the gaming state shown in FIG. 47(A). Further, the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 52 is a time axis. At the top of FIG. 52, as in FIG. 48, the layer number of the control data that is actually turned on and displayed by the lamp 09 when the control data is set in the control data area of each layer is shown. In FIG. 52, the variable display period is represented by the same time axis. The state in which the variable display is on indicates that the variable display is being performed. In FIG. 52, the reset timing of the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 and the advance notice A lamp control data of the layer 3 and the off-state timing related to the end of light emission will be described.

At T41, when the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 is set and turned on, the control data is not set in the other layers, so the lamp 09 becomes the normal BGM lamp control data of the layer 1. Lighting control is performed based on this.

At T42, when the variable display is turned on, that is, during the variable display, the BGM is changed. The vertical line in the time chart of the normal BGM lamp control data at T42 indicates that the BGM has been changed (set after reset). In the present embodiment, when the normal BGM lamp control data of Layer 1 is changed, the control data set in Layers 2 to 5 which are higher priority layers than Layer 1 are once reset. The case will be illustrated. At T42, since the control data is not set in the layers 2 to 5, the control data set in the layers 2 to 5 may not be reset.

At T43, when the notice A lamp control data of layer 3 is set and turned on, the lamp 09 is controlled to be lit based on the notice A lamp control data having a higher priority than the layer 1 normal BGM lamp control data. It

When the variable display ends at T44, the execution of the notice A lamp control data of layer 3 ends, and the lighting control of the lamp 09 based on the notice A lamp control data ends. On the other hand, even if the variable display ends, the execution of the normal BGM lamp control data of layer 1 continues to remain in the ON state. That is, in the control data area, the control data area in which the control data for continuing the light emission of the light emitting unit (lamp 09) is set when the variable display ends (the normal BGM lamp control data in the layer 1 is set). Control data area), and a control data area in which the control data in which light emission of the light emitting unit does not continue when the variable display is finished (control data area in which the notice A lamp control data of layer 3 is set) are set. And a data area).
With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable lighting effect for each control data area.

Note that the BGM lamp control data of layer 1 may be changed when the variable display is ended at T44. Along with changing the BGM lamp control data of Layer 1, layers higher than Layer 1 may be reset.

At T45, when the game machine is in the state where the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, the BGM lamp control data of the layer 1 is reset and the BGM lamp effect is ended. At T45, the game machine is in a state where the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, as described above, for a predetermined time (for example, after the first special figure reservation storage number and the second special figure reservation storage number become 0). It is when the production control board 012 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F00(H)) transmitted from the main board 011 after the elapse of 30 seconds. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the BGM lamp control data of layer 1 is changed when both the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number become 0. That is, the light emission of the lamp 9 ends when a predetermined time counted by the timer has elapsed since the BGM lamp control data was changed. In the control data area, the control data area (notification A lamp control data is set) in which the control data for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit is set when the variable display ends (at T44 when the variable display ends) Control data area of layer 3) and a control data area (a predetermined time measured by a timer) in which control data for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit when the light emission of the light emitting unit has elapsed for a predetermined time are set. The control data area of the layer 1 for setting the normal BGM lamp control data that ends the light emission when the time elapses. With such a configuration, it is possible to set control data for executing a suitable lighting effect for each control data area.
Note that, in FIG. 52, in the same gaming state (high base state), a control data area in which control data for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit when the variable display ends and the light emission of the light emitting unit for a predetermined time are set. The case where the control data area in which the control data for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit is set when the time passes is described. However, for example, different game states (big hit state) such as the control data area of the layer 3 for setting the data for winning count lamp control for ending the light emission when the predetermined time counted by the timer in FIG. 50 elapses. ), the control data area in which the control data for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit when the variable display ends is set, and the control data area for ending the light emission of the light emitting unit when the light emission of the light emitting unit has elapsed for a predetermined time It may have a control data area in which data is set.

Next, an example of the lamp control related to the same effect control command will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a time chart showing an example of lamp control related to the same effect control command.

In the layer 1 on the vertical axis shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that control data for executing the lighting effect of the lamp 09 in the low base state in the gaming state shown in FIG. 47A can be set. The horizontal axis shown in FIG. 53 is the time axis. Similar to FIG. 48, the uppermost part of FIG. 53 shows the layer number of the control data that is actually turned on and displayed by the lamp 09 when the control data is set in the control data area of each layer.

In FIG. 53, the reception of the initialization designation command and reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command are shown on the same time axis. The BGM effect of the customer waiting A is a lighting effect of the lamp 09 when the customer waiting demo designation command is received within the illustrated predetermined time t1 after the initialization designation command is received. The BGM effect of the customer waiting B is a lighting effect of the lamp 09 when the customer waiting demo designation command is received within a predetermined time t1 after receiving the initialization designation command. That is, in FIG. 53, the case where the customer A waiting BGM effect and the customer B wait BGM effect execute the lighting effect of the lamp 09 in different modes even when the same customer waiting demo designation command is received. To do.

At T51, the initialization designation command is received. The initialized command is a production control command transmitted when the gaming machine is initialized by turning on the power source or the like. Therefore, before T51, control data is not set in all layers. When the control data is not set, the lamp 09 is controlled so that it is not lit.

At T52, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received. It is assumed that T52 that receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command is within a predetermined time t1 from T51 that receives the initialization designation command. When a customer waiting demo designation command is received after a predetermined time t1 has passed from T51 when the initialization designation command is received, the customer waiting A BGM lamp control data for executing the customer waiting A BGM effect is layer 1 control data. Set to area.
At T53, the BGM lamp control data of the customer waiting A is reset and turned off.

On the other hand, at T54, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received. It is assumed that T54 that receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command is after a predetermined time t1 has elapsed from T51 when the initialization designation command was received. When the customer waiting demo designation command is received after a predetermined time t1 has passed from T51 when the initialization designation command is received, the customer waiting B BGM lamp control data for executing the customer waiting B BGM effect is the layer 1 control data. Set to area.
At T55, the BGM lamp control data of the customer waiting B is reset and turned off.

That is, in the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 53, the light emission of the light emitting unit (lamp 09, etc.) is controlled in response to a production control command (for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command) relating to production control, and the game is played. When the state of the machine (for example, whether it is within a predetermined time after receiving the initialization designation command) is different, different modes (customer waiting A BGM performance or customer waiting B The BGM effect) controls the light emission of the light emitting unit.
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect according to the state of the gaming machine.
Above, description of an example of the lamp control which concerns on the same production|generation control command using FIG. 53 is complete|finished.

Next, the details of the effect execution setting process (S0532) in the variable display start setting process (S0171) of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect execution setting process.

In the effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 54, the effect control CPU 0120 determines whether the game state is the high base state (S0902). When the gaming state is the high base state (S0902: YES), the effect control CPU 0120 determines whether the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (S0903). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (S0903; YES), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the BGM (reach variation) effect control data in layer 2 (S0904), and proceeds to S0906. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (S0903; NO), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the BGM (normal variation) effect control data in layer 1 (S0905), and proceeds to S0906.

Next, the effect control CPU 0120 performs an advance notice determination process for determining whether to execute the advance notice effect (S0906). Here, it is determined using the variation pattern and the random number value MR10. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, the random number value MR10 is used for determination. The effect control CPU 0120 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect from the determination result of the notice determination process (S0907). When the notice effect is not executed (S0907; NO), the process proceeds to S0909. On the other hand, when executing the notice effect (S0907; YES), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the notice effect control data in the layer 3 (S0908).

Next, the effect control CPU 0120 performs the confirmation notification determination process for determining whether to execute the confirmation notification effect (S0909). When the variation pattern indicates a big hit, the effect control CPU 0120 uses the variation pattern and the random number value MR11 to determine whether or not to execute the confirmation notification effect. The effect control CPU 0120 determines whether or not to execute the confirmation notification effect based on the determination result of the confirmation notification determination process of S0909 (S0910). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (S0910; NO), the process proceeds to S0912. On the other hand, when executing the confirmation notification effect (S0910; YES), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the control data of the confirmation notification effect in the layer 4 (S0911). Next, the effect control CPU 0120 selects each effect control pattern determined in each determination process (S0912), and ends the S0532 effect execution setting process.

Returning to the processing of S0902, when the gaming state is the low base state (S0902; NO), the processing proceeds to S0913 of FIG. The effect control CPU 0120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (S0913). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (S0913; YES), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the BGM (reach variation) effect control data in layer 1 (S0914), and proceeds to S0916. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (S0913; NO), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the BGM (normal variation) effect control data in layer 1 (S0915), and proceeds to S0916.

Next, the effect control CPU 0120 performs the notice B determination process for determining whether to execute the notice B effect (S0916). Here, it is determined using the variation pattern and the random number value MR10. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, the random number value MR10 is used for determination. The effect control CPU 0120 determines whether or not to execute the notice B effect based on the determination result of the notice B determination process (S0917). When the notice B effect is not executed (S0917; NO), the process proceeds to S0919. When executing the notice B effect (S0917; YES), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the notice B effect control data in the layer 2 (S0918).

Next, the effect control CPU 0120 performs the notice A determination process for determining whether to execute the notice A effect (S0919). Here, it is determined using the variation pattern and the random number value MR12. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined using the random number value MR12. The effect control CPU 0120 determines whether or not to execute the notice A effect from the determination result of the notice A determination process (S0920). When the notice A effect is not executed (S0920; NO), the process proceeds to S0922. When executing the notice A effect (S0920; YES), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the notice A effect control data in the layer 3 (S0921).

Next, the effect control CPU 0120 performs a finalization notification determination process for determining whether to execute the finalization notification effect (S0922). Here, it is determined using the variation pattern and the random number value MR11. For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using the random number value MR11. The effect control CPU 0120 determines whether or not to execute the final notification effect based on the determination result of the final notification determination process (S0923). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (S0923; NO), the process proceeds to S0912. On the other hand, when the confirmation notification effect is executed (S0923; YES), the effect control CPU 0120 sets the confirmation notification effect control data in the layer 4 (S0924), and in S0912 of FIG. Execute the process.
This is the end of the detailed description of the effect execution setting process (S0532) using FIGS. 54 and 55.

Note that in the time charts described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53, the control data set in the control data area of each layer is turned on independently, and the control data area having the highest priority is displayed. The case where the light is displayed based on the set control data is illustrated. However, when the control data areas of multiple layers are set, only the control data of the control data area with the highest priority is turned on, and the lighting display is performed based on the control data of the on state. You may do so.

Next, modifications and characteristic points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various types of device including the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 01, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 05 are described. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

(2) When the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is the special mode, the hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning award memory display area 05H. Of course, if any of the hold displays displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 05H has a hold display that is displayed in a special manner, one of the hold displays displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 05H or the active display. Alternatively, the pending change effect or the active display change effect may be executed.

(3) For example, the active display colors included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA have different expectations for executing the successful presentation, for example, each of the active display colors shown in FIGS. A setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode set as in 27 (C) may be used, and the success effect for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. It is also possible to use a setting example of the determination rate of the display mode in which the determination rate of the display mode of the active display such as the color of the active display after the setting is different.

(4) In the probability variation control, a specific area may be provided in advance in the special winning opening, and the gaming machine may be controlled to the probability variation state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. For example, based on a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, by being assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as "non-probable variation", "probable variation", and "probability", the game ball enters a specific area within the special winning opening. It may be a gaming machine that controls the gaming state to an easy one and controls the gaming ball to the probability changing state based on the fact that the gaming ball passes through this specific area.

(5) In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 01, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 05, and the like of the present invention. Any changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the invention.

(6) A game score for use in a game is given and given by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by information recorded on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by using a gaming score or a gaming score provided by a prize for a game to hit a gaming ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a gaming area.

That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area provided in the game area, a variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and deriving and displaying the display result. This is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means. However, when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine. A game is performed by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hitting of the game ball, and the game ball is awarded in the prize area provided in the game area. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds points. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game points is recorded, and a game recording medium. A game recording medium processing means for reading the record information recorded in the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion opening may be provided.

(7) In the above description, when the fluctuation is started in order to notify the fluctuation control pattern and the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the type of reach performance and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation to the performance control microcomputer (production control CPU 0120). Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 0100 (CPU 0103) determines whether the first command indicates presence/absence of pseudo-relationship, presence/absence of sliding effect, etc. before reaching reach (when not reaching. To the so-called second stop time) and a command indicating the change mode, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of the re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (when the reach is not reached). May transmit a command indicating a variation time or a variation mode after the so-called second stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. In the gaming control microcomputer 0100, the variation time is notified by each of two commands, and the specific variation mode executed at each timing is selected by the production control microcomputer. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined time has passed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

(8) The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed/provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 01. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device included in a computer device or the like. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

(9) The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executable, or may be directly executed by using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(10) Although the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is exemplified in the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100%. Of these, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, an example of the probability variation state control is shown in which the variation display result is derived and displayed as the probability variation big hit, and after the big hit game state ends, the probability variation state is unconditionally controlled to the probability variation state. However, not limited to this, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed a specific area provided in the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 07, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. The type of probabilistic state control may be performed.

(12) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode has been described in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating “0” to “9” and symbols indicating “−” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. Is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the special symbol that is variably displayed may be different from the special symbol that is derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, the special symbols that are not included in the varying plural types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the varying plural types of special symbols, those that are not derived and displayed as the variable display result may be displayed. May be included. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and a mode in which the variable display is executed using only one type of special symbol may be adopted. As a variable display using one kind of special symbol, for example, the one kind of special symbol may be blinked (lighting/lighting off may be alternately repeated). That is, the variable display may be repeated lighting and extinguishing. And, even in this case, the special symbol of the one type may be displayed (lit) at the end, or the symbol different from the one type may be displayed at the end. May be The same applies to the variable display of other symbols (for example, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

Further, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or by changing the update range of each random number.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as a game machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine having one or more of (BB), regular bonus (RB), RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (eg, slot machine 1) that performs a predetermined game as the slot machine as described above, and an opening/closing member (eg, front door 1b) that can open and close the front side. ), an opening/closing detection means for detecting opening/closing of the opening/closing member (for example, the processing of S151 in FIG. 15), an operation receiving means for receiving an operation from the outside (for example, player side setting switches 70, 170), and Setting means (for example, the processing of S158 of FIG. 15, processing of S177 of FIG. 16) capable of performing settings related to the game (for example, setting of volume and light amount) based on the operation received by the operation receiving means, When the opening/closing detecting unit detects the opening/closing of the opening/closing member, a prohibiting unit for prohibiting the setting by the setting unit (for example, when N is determined in S151 of FIG. 15, the player side effect setting process is ended. Part), a light emitting part (for example, the effect LED 52 shown in FIG. 4 provided in the slot machine), and a plurality of control data areas (for example, layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 47A). Among the set control data (for example, the data for executing the lighting control of the lamp 09 or the like), the priority order (for example, the layers assigned to the layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. A light emission control unit (e.g., shown in FIGS. 54 and 55) that controls light emission of the light emitting unit based on the control data set in the control data area having the highest priority such that the higher the number, the higher the priority). It may be a slot machine including the sub CPU 91a) that executes the effect execution setting process of S0532. In the slot machine, an example of the control data set in the control data area is the control data related to the error notification for notifying an error (for example, door open, hopper empty/full tank, etc.), determination of bonus, etc. These are control data related to notification, control data related to advance notice (notification) of establishment of a specific winning combination (cherry, watermelon, special replay, etc.), control data related to BGM, and the like. In the slot machine, as the game state in the slot machine, control data may be set according to various states such as a normal state, BB, RB, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

1 slot machine, 1a housing, 1b front door, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 5 1 BET switch, 6 MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 32L, 32C, 32R reel motor, 37 Setting key switch, 41 main control unit, 60 store side setting switch, 70 player side setting switch, 91 sub control unit, 100 pachinko gaming machine, 100a outer frame, 100b front frame, 160 store side setting switch, 170 player side Setting switch, 01 Pachinko gaming machine, 0151A 1st special figure reservation storage section, 0151B 2nd special figure reservation storage section, 0194A 1st start winning prize reception command buffer, 0194B 2nd starting prize reception command buffer, 05 image display device , 0102 RAM, 005HL first start winning prize memory display area, 005HR second starting prize winning memory display area, 0120 effect control CPU.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display ,
An openable and closable member,
An opening/closing detection means for detecting the opened/closed state of the opening/closing member,
Operation receiving means for receiving the operation of the player,
Setting means capable of adjusting the volume based on the operation accepted by the operation accepting means when a setting screen for adjusting the volume is displayed on the display section,
Prohibiting means for prohibiting the adjustment of the volume by the setting means based on the setting screen when the open/close detecting means detects that the opening/closing member is in the open state;
A light emitting part,
And a light emission control unit for controlling light emission of the light emitting portion based on the control data priority is set to the highest said control data area in the control data set to a plurality of control data area ,
The display mode of the setting screen is the first based on the operation received by the operation receiving unit while the setting screen is displayed when the open/close detection unit detects that the open/close member is in the closed state. In the case where the first display mode indicating the sound volume is changed to the second display mode indicating the second sound volume, the open/close detecting unit detects again that the open/close member is in the open state, and then the open/close detecting unit again detects the open state. when said closing member is a closed state is detected, it possible to adjust the volume from the second volume in the display mode of the setting screen is displayed again in the second display mode,
A plurality of control data area includes a control data area where the control data variable display is continued light emission of the light emitting portion when finished is set, the light emitting unit emission when the variable display has ended There is a control data area where control data that is not continued is set,
The light emission of the light emitting unit based on the control data in which the light emission of the light emitting unit is continued when the variable display is finished is finished when the variable display is not executed for a predetermined time,
A gaming machine characterized by that .

Images